Home

R&S FPS-K82/-K83 CDMA User Manual

1. 55 PUG UA ON usa sees sats a d caa oer ated tend RN DE 71 AUTO si oes 71 Configuring remote sese 148 Eeleren S 71 External Manual Sjeu or pL M N PU e EN Auto level leegen eege Reference level SOflK6y iiie E AUto Scallnig sos those eaten ce P rece P o es ae E 90 Meastime Auto D Meastime Manual Remote commands Autosearch Channel detection cuerno ri teet ente eu 45 Average e LEE 88 B Bandclasses er T 232 PSTN eerte cS 95 96 172 SEM Supported Bandwidth Coverage MSRA mode sse 50 Menu Base spreading factor sssssss 41 99 171 Base station SOC BIO C H 10 Base transceiver station Lia cc 10 Bit Reverse Code table X 229 SOM OFQGE iuis esos erroe a EERE 40 100 169 Bitstream Evaluation method sesssesseeeeenee 18 Trace TesultS ucn coiere c rera Ero eene 193 Branches EE we 42 PAM ALY SIS eessen Eed 45 Evaluation range 101 168 Retievihng porose garran 193 SGIC e E 101 168 ER 10 C Capture Length isa eei erri etre meet Capture offset MSRA applications Remote SOfIKGy octets a eegene troie aro keeper nocere domua 15 ges S 47 CCDF
2. 69 Frequency error Measurement examples sees 117 RRESUIES remote nuce teneis Ch oec entree 188 deccm 202 Frontend GORFIGUFIIO necne ooo ene tende EE eme to Red 68 Configuring remote sseeseeseesee 142 H Hadamard Gode table cecinere ret enn the OR Rekord esae 229 SOM OIQGEF iiic rici odi arii 40 100 169 Hardware settings BEE ect erii 13 Hysteresis Lower A to level 2 netten 91 Ere 76 Upper Auto level ices eei ce 91 l UO data Export file binary data description 237 Export file parameter description 234 EXPOMING iere ot eco 45 99 9 Exp rting Bi EE 217 IMPON Gisan eter tota Ove Rt aer e arce 53 55 Importing remote eene 217 IMPOMING EXPOMING s etiaro ciet ea troie ns 52 UO Power Trigger level remote eeeeeeeeee 152 IF Power hale GT 75 Trigger level remote esee 152 Impedance Rue 141 fup 65 Importing VQ data eeose UO data remote feci EE Inactive Channel Threshold ussssssss 81 158 Input elle EE 65 Coupling remote iiien carse tnter no entire 140 RE 33i ei E E N beet a cens cS 65 Settings etes 64 72 Source Configuration softkey ssss 64 Source Radio frequency RE 64 instalation
3. entere eh a iaaa 144 SENSe FREQUENCY TE 144 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 68 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 143 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 69 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Configur
4. Parameters Comment Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table CONF CDP CTAB DATA 9 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 00 8 1 0 0 0 0 140 00 7 150 256 9 0 1 0 00 Defines the table values Manual operation See Comment on page 84 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt Modulation lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt Status lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 6 2 9 4 BTS Channel Details on page 84 Parameters lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt Example Mode Numeric channel type according to table 11 2 2 Code class depending on spreading factor see table 4 1 0 spreading factor 1 Channel number without SF Modulation type including mapping Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Always 0 reserved Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting com
5. riii 174 ood go the RE E 180 11 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 133 PII I6lir me 173 DISPlay WINDOWS SIZE vest EE 174 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 177 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a mea
6. RC radio configuration definition of sample rate permissible data rates modulation types and use of special channels and transmit diversity S1CH Supplemental 1 channel 1 2 or 2 4 in higher layers this channel is also referred to as supplemental channel 0 SCHO S2CH Supplemental 2 channel 2 4 or 6 8 in higher layers this channel is also referred to as supplemental channel 1 SCH1 SCHO Refer to S1CH SCH1 Refer to S2CH Set a group of 64 consecutive PCGs Abbreviations SF spreading factor SYNC synchronisation channel 32 64 TD transmit diversity two antennas used TDPICH transmit diversity pilot channel 16 128 Xy Walsh code x y with code number x and spreading factor y of the channel List of Remote Commands CDMA2000 SENSE DATE M21 es marisi eded i eae a ended aaa 165 ISENS JADJUSCCONFIg re HU Otter 166 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 2 non enr enit eiit rn th nnt ta ebd 166 SENSe ADJust CONFigure H YS Teresis LOWer oerte rrr r pn dt a he nee na Enn oa 167 SENSe JAD3Just CONFigure H YS Tleresis UPPer i cire nt ie rep e en E EE exe Rees EE Do E EMT 167 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSE AVERa g sn gt COUN Eeer A deride ea e ante Pda de ede 164 ISENS e ee ME EE 137 SENSe CDPower CODE norm retener eae n etd RE EE Ve OR D e ROTE E EA EEUU EXE Ee RS 168 EI E e ee e enge DE 158 ISENS CDPOWErIQLSN gta a 156
7. Table 4 2 Relationship between various code parameters for CDMA2000 MS signals Code Spreading No codes Symbol rate ksps Symbols per PCG class factor channel 1 2 128 614 4 768 2 4 64 307 2 384 3 8 32 153 6 192 4 16 16 76 8 96 5 32 8 38 4 48 6 64 4 19 2 24 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 39 Code Display and Sort Order Number of bits per symbol Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following number of bits e BPSK 1 bit for BTS signals only the I component is assigned e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits QPSK BPSK mm 00 e e ou o e e I mn 1100 e e 1000 1000 e e Fig 4 1 Bits per symbol constellations for different modulation types in the BTS application 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order In the result displays that refer to codes the currently selected code is highlighted in the diagram You select a code by entering a code number in the Evaluation Range settings By default codes are displayed in ascending order of the code number Hadamard order The currently selected code number is highlighted If the code belongs to a detected active channel the entire channel is highlighted For details on active chan nels and channel detection see chapter 4 8 Channel Detection and Channel Types on page 45 However in CDMA2000 signals the codes that belong to the same chan
8. 11 6 1 Configuring RF Measurements Example CDP TPM ON Activates timing and phase offset CDP SLOT 2 Selects slot 2 CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES TOFF Reads out timing offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES POFF Reads out the phase offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 Manual operation See Timing and phase offset calculation on page 99 Configuring RF Measurements RF measurements are performed in the Spectrum application with some predefined settings as described in chapter 3 2 RF Measurements on page 30 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FPS User Manual The cdma2000 RF measurements must be activated in a CDMA2000 application see chapter 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel on page 130 The individiual measurements are activated using the CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 command see chapter 11 4 Selecting a Measurement on page 133 e Special RF Configuration Commands 1e tesa ceti esee ht teca ka aon a Re 172 e Analysis for RF Measurements seien ennt danni tha dana tnn 173 Special RF Configuration Commands In addition to the common RF measurement configuration commands described for the base unit the following special commands are available in cdma2000 applications CONFigure CDPower BT
9. 22 2 mec te i cece 201 Composite EVM itn tette nerit tere naa 16 Evaluatiori metho 22 neci erp trecenti 22 Measurement examples i 120 Trace results cid ates sees cut ewe eee ee 202 Continue single sweep inci M 89 Continuous sweep feci e 89 Conventions SCPlcommarids iur eerte ta ertet 125 Copying Measurement channel remote 130 Coupling Input remiote e ote ete e 140 eee a 47 Cut off frequency REC TINGE oie ent eects 62 64 135 D Data acquisition EE 78 79 156 see Sigrial capturing erts etn trend 78 Data format Remote Data input Data output DC offset Ere 99 eei 47 Default values xi 56 Delta markers DEMING E 105 Diagram footer information sse 13 Diagrams Evaluation method ettet ete 35 Direct path Ee 141 Display Configuration remote oin ie aaan 223 INFORMATION i est iiia ree a 12 Display configuration ejl 14 54 Domain conflict Channel table 2 atn eet ces 86 88 Drop out time Kee m 76 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 130 E Jie M 47 Electronic input attenuation sosisini aeeiiaii 71 Eliminating lee 99 169 Enhanced algorithm Multicarrier signal
10. 67 77 Overview Configuring cdma2000 nni 57 P Parameters e N 15 Channel table ms NEI TEE 16 PCDE Evaluation method iot etienne trees 24 Measurement examples sse 122 Trace results cet tes oe ini en occ dete 202 POG oana 14 Captured RE 156 DIS ry 13 Evaluation range 101 169 Numiber ot Symbols gie tct eerte nh te ree the 38 POWE MCI cci gm Selecting m desc c ED eie ETT Peak Code Domain Error SOGPODE tere eee Dese edad au 24 Peak list Evaluation method ie et nter enn 36 Peak search OY iss sosta Meu dad oc reiecit vdd Op Du Poe eR 108 Du 107 Peaks Marker positioning NEXE iiec ens Softkey Performing cdma2000 measuremernt isisisi aes 111 Phase Discontinuity vs PCG Trace results temet rt ne oec rm ette roc es 202 Phase Error vs Chip Evaluation Phase offset Calculating Results remote iesse ies petitione ctae 188 191 usd Eh 193 PICH p 47 Power reference 100 170 DONKEY oci tmt Debent endless 108 Pilot POW T T 16 Pilot Power Gp PN offset Hs False Measurement example sssr 120 Power Absolute 2 2 anita es tt cce a 16 19 I ca 21 41 Channels 16 19 30 93 Plo iem al E E onda 16 Reference 100
11. Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Table 1 2 Base station channel table for main branch in radio configuration 4 MPC RC4 Radio Configuration F PICH 0 64 F SYNC 32 64 F PCH F CHAN 1 64 9 128 10 128 11 128 15 128 17 128 25 128 Table 1 3 Base station test model for aggregate signal in radio configuration 4 TDC_RC4 Channel Type F PICH Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Code SF 16 128 Radio Configuration F SYNC 32 64 F PCH 1 64 F CHAN 9 128 10 128 11 128 15 128 17 128 25 128 A A A A DP A Table 1 4 Base station test model for aggregate signal in radio configuration 4 BPC_RC4 Channel Type Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Radio Configuration F PICH 1 0 64 s TDPICH 1 16 128 F SYNC 1 32 64 Reference Code Tables Channel Type Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Radio Configuration F PCH 1 64 F CHAN 9 128 10 128 11 128 15 128 17 128 25 128 A Bh A A A A A 2 Reference Code Tables Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables The following tables show the code sequences with Hadamard and BitReverse orders for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays As an example the corresponding cells for channel 8 32 channel number 8 for spreading factor 32 are marked to show where t
12. Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FPS is adapted according to this value it is recommen ded that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 147 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FPS so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FPS must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed referenc
13. ccc ccceccceceeeeenceeeeeeeeneeteeeeeneetedeneeneeas 83 e BIS Channel Detalle er ott tete etae ce tn ite vendas coe ke cr eerte ee tte 84 e MS Channel Detalle oed grise rd eer d eret eeu ced etin 86 6 2 9 1 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view Code Domain Analysis Inactive Channel Threshold 60 0 dB Predefined Channel Tables Yom mere oti alate ate al ale Es sa Predefined f uinebsicts geal Generated by CDMA2000 inactive Channel ee DE 81 Using Predefined Channel Tables otn e ror RR ater 81 Inactive Channel Threshold Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total sig nal in order to be recognized as an active channel The default value is 60 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the CDMA2000 test models are detected by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 158 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined channel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Code Domain Analysis Auto Detects channels automatically using pilot seq
14. ccccccssssseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeenseeeeseeeeees 40 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes eee 42 Code Mapping and Branches ccccecceeeeeseeee eee eeee eee NEEN EEEEEE EE aru Naai anarai 42 Radio COmfiQgurations ciicic cccccccccececccccceccescctcceessteccieeesttesiecessnetsaceesstztieeeestzecieeesstzoaaeeest 43 Transmission with Multiple Carriers and Multiple Antennas 43 Channel Detection and Channel Types eeeeeeeenenneennenem enn 45 Test Setup for CDMA2000 TesSts seeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeesseeaneeseeseeeeeeseseeesseaaeeeeeeeeenees 47 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode eee 49 UO Data Import and Export ssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeennn 52 Import Export FUNCTIONS ccceceeeeeecee REENEN EENEG 52 Configuratio enone eee enon eee eens eee ee ee eee 54 Result DiS play cucoana et ameter te trinus 54 Code Domain Analysis tiene ceudenceedencceeusdecevensadeceeseeusecenedecsccueedexeseeres 55 SALLLELAIIMIJHCSHERCDIL DIDI CIE ces 93 Dci m 98 Code Domain Analysis Settings eeeeseeeeeeeeeenenennnennn nnne nnn nnns 98 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 3 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Contents 7 2 Evaluation Range eccccccccctccccccccccciescecesceesccceceueccessettecseseecticcas
15. lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writ
16. 2 tici dee pete v RR TRAE EE aie s eoa da Fere SEA 139 SENSe CDPower LCODe MASK Mask Defines the long code mask of the mobile in hexadecimal form Note For the default mask value of 0 the long code offset see is not taken into con sideration Parameters Mask Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example INST SEL MC2K Activate cdma2000 MS by default CDP relative is displayed in screen A and Result Summary in screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source CDP LCOD MASK HF Define long code mask INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization Manual operation See Long Code Mask on page 62 SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE Mode This command selects the mode of the long code generation Parameters Mode STANdard The cdma2000 standard long code generator is used ESG101 The Agilent ESG option 101 long code is used in this case only signals from that generator can be analysed RST STANdard Manual operation See Long Code Generation on page 63 SENSe CDPower LCODe OFFSet lt CodeOffset gt Defines the long code offset including the PN offset This offset is applied at the next trigger pulse which cannot occur until a setup time of 300 ms has elapsed This command is ignored if SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE is set to 0 Parameters lt CodeOffset gt Offset in chips in h
17. DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE NS OUNCE DISPlay dei ru DISPlay MTABI T M BIS E VIRTU VIBIe S TEAEZIPa c DISPlayEWINDowsri TRAGestz MODE ttr t rtr pr eer rt eorr ert rer tes DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE sees 145 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum esee enne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe PDlVision essent enne DISPlay WINDowsn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEWVel rnnt rnt rnnt eene DilSblavtWiNDow nzTRACectGvTSCALelbRlEvelOEtF Get 147 BISPlay WINDowsriz TRACES OT u a nnno em eme eo et torret re petri ge eet re eese nae DISPlayEWINDowWsriz ZOOM AREA rib rtr rep eer veneta enne e E ETENEE EA EEEE ENEFA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sess nennen nnne 182 RUE VER On Ree ER H 181 FORMaEBDEXPort RE TEE 205 FORMatl DAWA 191 ll El 183 INI NEI Eer in CEET 183 INITiate lt n gt REFResh INITiatesns SEQue ncer Ee EE 184 INI Tiatesns SEQuencer IMMedi le 22 etre triente erac cruce axes Yeeeah Vivier ace id 185 INI NEIE ee le E 185 INITiatesn SEQuencerREFResh
18. ISENSe CDPower Bee OT 138 EI E e Ree eg Bea RE Oe 139 SENSe CGDPower ECOD6 ORFSel E 139 SENSe CDPower RTR TEE 224 SENSe CDPower MAPPitlg EE SENSe CDPower NORMalize D SENSe CDPOWer ER EE EI E e ee e EE SENSe CDPower PNOFISSL EE EI Ee ee DE 170 EI E e ee e err rr RR eh re ener oth e eee LEE Ee E EPI ed 170 SENSe GDPower PRESOU EE SENSe CDPower QINVert EE EI Est BIB ol i es p M S SENSe GDPower SET COUN actes tr en rire FP crea taste sanee ead e vase ede a EI E e ee Ee EE SENS CDPOWer SLOW en SENSe CDPower T EE SENSe FREQuUuency GENTGr inre rene rtr ti nee e ER SOR REDE EENI a PH ERE NATEN ER sean SER CREER EY ER EK ERE SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP ISENS J FREQUENCY CENTES TER FAUT Op iiie Ere EENS SENSe FREQu ncy CENTer STEP LINK a iva 2 cc race certare necne Qala hawt AREE EYE UE SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINKEAGTOLF ei ertt rtt ret arp det e E ean SENSE FREQUENCY EE SENSe MSRA GAPT re OF FSet nr oreet aeara cr s e LER E E tea Fa REEKSE a TORENTE CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz MAimumlEET A CALCulatesn DEETa markeresm MAXimurm NEXT cuenca citer aee skin me kun NEE c i sneak ue eR NERA CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz MiNimum LEET CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A CALCulate lt n gt DELTam
19. R amp S9FPS K82 K83 Welcome to the CDMA2000 Applications 2 1 d Starting the CDMA2000 Applications The CDMA2000 measurements require special applications on the R amp S FPS Manual operation via an external monitor and mouse Although the R amp S FPS does not have a built in display it is possible to operate it inter actively in manual mode using a graphical user interface with an external monitor and a mouse connected It is recommended that you use the manual mode initially to get familiar with the instru ment and its functions before using it in pure remote mode Thus this document describes in detail how to operate the instrument manually using an external monitor and mouse The remote commands are described in the second part of the document For details on manual operation see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual To activate the CDMA2000 applications 1 Press the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FPS 2 Select the cdma2000 BTS or cdma2000 MS item Es F CDMA2000 BTS CDMA2000 MS The R amp S FPS opens a new measurement channel for the CDMA2000 application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the CDMA2000 Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 2 Configuration Overview on page 57 Multi
20. Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 214 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 216 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 217 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 216 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 215 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 217 Marker To PICH Sets the marker to the PICH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DICH on page 214 Markers Marker To TDPICH Sets the marker to the TDPICH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TDPIch on page 214 Error Messages 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement 8 1 Synchronization fai
21. cdma2000 Me TC 34 Configuring cdma2000 CDA 14 Analysis settings BTS 198 elle ie WEE 55 Configuring remote sssse 134 Evaluation settings BTS remote wn 169 Parame eessen eae 15 Performing eee 111 lici LR 15 CDE AK ee MC eg 24 CDEP Belle ELE 21 BIO E 99 171 Evaluation method A 20 dee EE 197 cdma2000 BASICS Introduction Measurements E Remote commande A 124 CDMA2000 Programming examples ode nente iiias 224 cdma2000 mode Error messages eire ertet rk 110 OPUIMIZING WT 110 Reference s 220 RF measurements netter tha 30 Troubleshooting rna 110 CDP Absolute Relative sisiraan iasi 99 170 Channel table sssssssssss 86 88 162 163 Golor assigriment rent rrr ern 21 Display a Evaluation method te ee 20 Measurement examples irsiisriiiisriiisii ni 117 Reference power 100 170 Results remote soinen eere 188 Retrieving n193 Trace results once au 197 Triggered Measurement example a 119 Center frequency iere tnter erras 68 Deviation Measurement example 118 Softkey Step size Channel bandwidth Ile 50 Channel Dar ue ees er de 12 Channel detection A tosearch EE 45 jefe myrto tal EE 80 Methods 45 Predefined tables cese ni
22. nels 6 2 9 5 MS Channel Details Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Code Domain Analysis hannel Detectio Channel Walsh Sym Rate Power 0 32 38 4 I B 2 8 eur NK 87 Channel Number Ch SF DE 87 Symbol ccc 88 EI ele m 88 zw neetine 88 Scu M rrr eer 88 Domain Colle cid p Rap i ada Re ERR AER edax Rp ker RARE 88 Channel Type Type of channel according to CDMA2000 standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 8 1 BTS Channel Types on page 45 or chapter 4 8 2 MS Channel Types on page 46 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 6 2 10 Code Domain Analysis Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitte
23. 170 Reference Display A IST EEN Threshold Total vs PCG vs symbol Power control groups tiec RES 14 38 Power vs PCG Evaluation method eege Big 26 Trace E EE 202 Power vs Symbol Evaluation Method ee neces 27 TfAce result 72 2 1 orte trt t erento cio EEGEN 203 Preamplifier Setting Softkey Predefined channel tables Antenna TEE 44 BES ME 227 ENEE e ele ER BTS mode 159 Channel detection 45 MS AppliCation eist rte ek itte tet 82 MS MOJE orienter Cose pe Lido do eod 159 PROVIDED PE PE 82 159 RROSUONING Eeer 83 160 Eie M 81 161 Presetting e Lu EEN 58 224 Default Values iei e Coe 56 ee D 76 Programming examples CDMA2000 WEE 224 Q Quasi inactive codes cicer scis cite 45 R Radio configuration SOG C ued 19 43 Range fel E 73 19 43 BIS application 5n ueris teret e hores oana 43 Channel table a scie anii 86 162 Channel tables sssessssss 227 Retrieving ins IQS Reference lev l i52 citet ere rara te anaana 70 Reference Dower sssssssssssssssssreesesrssressrrnsessnresennne 100 170 Refreshing MSRA applications remote ssssss 220 Remote commands BaSicsS Bu s cae ic E ma c ER ne eser EIN dn 124 Boolean values E Capitalization E Character data Data blocks ces NUMERIC values enini ra EE rain mach crac
24. CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT 216 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 216 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt na noaanaannnananooannnonnnnnrnnnnnnnanrennnennnnnnn 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumcNENT 217 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 217 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 217 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search incl
25. CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter Manual operation See Filter Type on page 61 See Roll Off Factor on page 61 See Cut Off Frequency on page 62 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo State This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm Manual operation See Enhanced Algorithm on page 61 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State This command activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates the multicarrier settings Manual operation See Multicarrier on page 61 SENSe CDPower ANTenna lt AntennaState gt This command deactivates the orthogonal transmit diversity two antenna system or defines the antenna for which the result display is evaluated For details on antenna diversity see also chapter 4 7 2 Antenna Diversity on page 44 Parameters lt AntennaState gt OFF 1 2 OFF The aggregate signal from both antennas is f
26. Pe 67 77 lp dT M 77 153 Trigger E TE 76 External trigger remote 151 UO Power remote A 152 IF Power remote seoir anniina aeae 152 RF Power remote i heeded 152 Trigger source sero External cerie aE 75 Free RUN ege Eeeeegeteeeege crite eniinn Ey 75 IF Power 75 Trigger to frame 9 Querying remote gd 1 ener ede do 188 Troubleshootlirig rre toit re ree 110 U UE User equipment see MS Mobile station seee 10 Units Ee cite re iren epi eii 70 Updating Result display remote AAA 220 Upper Level Hysteresis 2 91 EIN EE 8 Ww Wal Ree inte Deben e i toe nr re ERR R RE 19 Windows Adding nl E 174 Closing remote iate a ret dens 177 179 COMMQUMING WEE 59 Layout remote 177 Maximizing remote A 174 Querying remiote 2 carent tret 176 Replacing remote 4 ertet teens 177 Splitting remote ctore tcm 174 Title Dar M 13 Types remote rne tiens 174 X X value Market rcs tecto el 104 Y Y maximum Y minimum GE WEE 73 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating ses Activating Deactivating remote Z Zooming Activating remote netter 181 Area Multiple mode remote 2 4 181 Area remote 180 Deactlvatilig c noscit ote Geta bac re rr tbe neat 92 Multiple mmodB nisiodo enter en
27. Restore Scale WITIdDW iuri oi erret red eere e E iain ence 73 Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 146 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 146 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 145 Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window 6 2 6 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview R amp S FPS K82 K83 Configuration rrigger ig Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Drop Out Time Offset Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FPS are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger It Trigger 3
28. TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 150 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 150 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements only Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 151 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 150 Code Domain Analysis Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 153 Capture Offset Trigger Source This setting is only available for applications in MSR
29. Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams Code Domain Analysis If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 164 SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 164 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on t
30. lt n gt is irrelevant In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 88 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached 11 5 8 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FPS performs one single measurement in single measurement mode In continuous measurement mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 measurements is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measu
31. on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIG IN connector on rear panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIG AUX connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 76 Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trig
32. 101 am00101 5 10001 1 01000141000 101 1000101 69 101010 1 0 100100100 101 0100101 3T 0011 1 o 1 aga oO 1 1 1 1 ga aga ini 4100104 ini 1010100 1 0 101000010 101 10101 21 1010101 1 010120 110 10 101 1010101 SS 1010110 1 0 101100110 101 0110101 53 1010111 1 D 1 cO 1 1 1 3 1 gc 1 od 4110104 UI 101100 1 0 11007000001101 001101 13 101101 1 01 12020131001 1750 t 101101 T 1011010 1 0 1 10100101101 0101101 4s iniit 1 O 1 1 DO 1 1 1 3 a 1 t1 D 1 4101101 103 1011100 1 0 11107000011101 011101 29 1011101 1 D 41140 120 11 101 1011101 33 11110 1 0111100111101 0111101 51 1011111 1 DO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 OQ 1 4111101 125 10000 1 10 000000000 1 1 riu 3 10001 1 10 0004141000 0 1 1 1000011 EI 110010 1 10 00 1001000 1 1 01001 1 35 110011 1 3 0 0 DO 1 1 1 1000 1 1 4100014 ER 1100100 1 10 0 10000100 1 1 rum um 19 1100101 110010 d 10 10D 1 1 1010011 83 1100110 1 100 1 1001100 141 1 0110011 1 1 10 0 1 t i t1 t1 1 0 DO 1 1 1110011 US 110100000010 1 1 m1011 11 105 110101 110100 f 100141011 1001011 7s 106 1101010 1 410101050120 10 1 1 0101011 aa 107 101017 1 10 1 DO 1 1 1 10 1 ond 1101011 107 103 1101100 1 10 110000 10 1 1 11011 21 108 01101 1 10 1 1 0 10 10141 1011011 91 110 101110 1010411 40 0 1 15 10 1 t1 0111011 E 111 i111 1 D 4d 1 4 5310 1 1 1 D 4 1 1111011 123 112 111000 1110000000111 Di T 113 W101 111000 f 10000 11 1000111 71 ul W110 1 1100100100 41 1411 0100111 39 us ium 2 1 0 o ga 1 9 1 aga D LI
33. 1100111 103 116 110100 1 1 101000010 1 1 1 010111 23 17 1110101 1 11010141010 1 1 1 1010111 ST 118 111010 1 1101100110 111 0110111 ss 119 4110111 1 1 2 cd 12 1 1 1 9 1 c 1 1 1 1110111 113 12 111100 1111000 OO 0 1 1 t1 Di 15 121 11101 1114100 10020 41 1 1 1 101111 79 122 1111010 1 1110100101111 0101111 a 123 4111011 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 92 it ot i 14 1 1101111 111 124 4111100 1 1111000011111 011111 21 125 1111101 1 1111011011111 1011111 9s 126 HAAL 0 3 31 3 4 OF O 1 d 1 1 1 1 0111111 53 127 fitit 1 2 2 2 2 12 1 2 12 2 12 2 1 1 14411111 127 Fig 1 3 Code table for base spreading factor 128 part 2 A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the CDMA2000 standard The used bandclass is defined in the SEM or ACLR measure ment settings see Bandclass on page 95 Table 1 5 Supported bandclasses for CDMA2000 RF measurements Bandclass SCPI para Description 0 0 800 MHz Cellular Band 1 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band 2 2 TACS Band UO Data File Format iq tar Bandclass SCPI para Description 3A 3 JTACS Band 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and x 846 MHz 2860 MHz and lt 895 MHz 3B 21 JTACS Band 2810 MHz and x 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and x 846 MHz 3C 22 JTACS Band lt 810 MHz and gt 8
34. 13 3 1 fives 6540 711 0 1 Retrieving Results 6 63 54 7 0 CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative BitReverse Channel 8 32 can now be directly read out with its total power The sort order changes in accordance with BitReverse Result Ze Oy lebr Ly 6 32 13 351 6 16 56 3 0 6 48 52 8 0 5 8 8 0 1 6 24 9 0 2 Misse by ly Te Sy ly 6 63 54 7 0 Measurement Example Retrieving the Code Domain Power MS mode The example shows the results of the query for 2 channels with the following configura tion Chan type Ch no SF Code class Mapping Power PICH 0 32 5 I 7 0 dB CCCH 2 8 10 0 dB INST SEL MC2K Activate cdma2000 MS default is CDP relative in window 1 and Result Summary in window 2 Mapping set to I INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDDP MAPP Q Select Q branch CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Q Result 5 0 452 3 3 By 1 953 3 0 EE 25916 1 1 Dy Sy Poo 320 Sine Dy S 958B 2 0 5 10 16 0 1 5 11 53 4 0 De engt D D 5 18 9154 8 1 D 19 953 3 0 525 751 07 0 5726 216 1 1 5 27 54 1 0 5 31 95J3 7 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive since PICH is set to I Channel 2 8 is distributed between the active codes Retrieving Results 2 32 10 32 18
35. 156 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 79 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 168 Application Data MSRA For the CDMA2000 BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see Number of Sets on page 79 Code Domain Analysis In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the CDMA2000 BTS measurement see Capture Offset on page 77 The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected PCG code or set to analyze which is defined for the evalua tion range depending on the result display Note that the PCG code set is analyzed within the application data 6 2 9 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal Inactive Channel Threshold 60 0 dB Predefined Channel Tables BTE siae iia rie ate al ale si sa Predefined fzXirersists ge d Predefined Tables Generated by CDMA2000 Delete e General Channel Detection Seltlings erento etse neta 80 e Channel Table ManaggRmient eii nre ceret eere eae sete rue Es 82 e Channel Table Settings and Functions
36. 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 131 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 131 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 Activating the Measurement Channel INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel
37. 206 Channel Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR performs an adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to CDMA2000 specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FPS measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed in the Result Sum mary EIM User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 31 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Ref Level 7 3 RBW 10 kHz Att SWT 100 ms s VBW 300 kHz eep 1 ACLR iRm Clrw CF 850 0 MHz 1001 pts 419 0 kHz Span 4 19 MHz 2 Result Summary CDMA 2000 Channel Bandwidth Offset Power TX1 Re 229 MHz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm 30 000 kHz 750 000 kHz 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 30 000 kHz 1 980 MHz 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Bandwidth Upper Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ACLR see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the CDMA2000 signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by the CDMA2000 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass Thus the pe
38. 45 Remote commands 157 158 Search mode 81 161 fec RM 80 Channel numbers 1 edd ei tentent 16 19 Configuring in table E Retrieving pr Channel power AGIIR See ACLR 1 eot sen et dte td 31 Channel tables Adding Channel eet retentis 84 IR 86 88 162 163 Channel number 85 87 162 163 Channel status sssssssss 86 88 162 163 Channel type eege e nente ie 85 87 162 163 COMMENT neriie tete ae 84 161 COMPANSON e 45 Configuring Configuring remote sseeseseeeees 161 iere 83 160 eicere 83 164 Creating from measurement ss 84 133 Deleting pem 83 160 D eleting channel 2 ici eese tas 84 D tails B TS ette ra reet ached 84 RER ET 86 Domain conflict 86 88 so afe ER ET TERR 83 Evaluation method 2 ees 18 NUES Ur PPP 82 Managing remote sese 158 Mapping 88 163 Name 84 164 Paramelers geet Eeer 19 Predefined TEE 227 IS oos tereti ibo eed retrato beta P Osee 86 162 RECENT eur Results remote Selected Selectilig EE iuro ee Sorting E Trace results irisse ed Channel types I eh Configuring in table ie Detected evi eho hae Detected BTS ier ettet Detected MS T hf Par
39. 61 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 137 Multicarrier Filter Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multicarrier signals This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 61 is activated For details see chapter 4 7 1 Multicarrier Mode on page 43 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 136 Filter Type Multicarrier Selects the filter type if Multicarrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Fre quency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF
40. CDMA2000 standard and the desired measurement Set the PN offset 4 10 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The CDMA2000 BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the CDMA2000 BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal cap R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics ture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the CDMA2000 BTS measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for CDMA2000 1 2288 MHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual re
41. CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Sorting the Table Sorts the channel table entries Cancelling the Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box 6 2 9 4 BTS Channel Details Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Code Domain Analysis Channel Table Gett n O Add Channel Name RECENT Comment Generated by CDMA2000 Delete Channel Channel Walsh Sym Rate State Domain Measure Table Type Ch SF ksps Conflict Sort Table Channel OQ 85 Channel Number Chi SF ctor nt eaten hee a Eee ern corner p Ree Eau ep date Rex 85 yis Nc 85 cl acta hes tse venice E E E taunt teen a cae E E enn ad 86 xo pM 86 zr H P 86 Doman GONG GE 86 Channel Type Type of channel according to CDMA2000 standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 8 1 BTS Channel Types on page 45 or chapter 4 8 2 MS Channel Types on page 46 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162
42. Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 174 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FPS K82 K83 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the cent
43. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 92 SS aa User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 181 Starting a Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 92 See Restore Original Display on page 92 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 92 11 8 Starting a Measurement The measurement is started immediately when a cdma2000 application is activated however you can stop and start a new
44. For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 131 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 131 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the channel with the name Spectrum4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Activating the Measurement Channel Example INST LIST Result for 3 mea
45. MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Code Domain Analysis RC The Radio Configuration RC can be customized for two channel types For the PDCH you can set the configuration to either 10 QPSK 10 8PSK or 10 16QAM For CHAN channels you can set the radio configuration to 1 2 or 3 5 For details on radio configurations see chapter 4 6 Radio Configuration on page 43 Power Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after you press the Meas button see Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 84 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Domain Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan
46. Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 192 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned chan nel and the pilot channel see SENSe CDPower TPMeas command To query the detailed channel information use the TRAC DATA TRACE1 command for a window with Channel Table evaluation LIST Queries the results of the peak list evaluation for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For each peak the following entries are given peak frequency absolute level of the peak distance to the limit line For details refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Mag Error vs Chip on page 23 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 25 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The results of the trace data query TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command For each evaluation method the returned values for the trace data query are described in the following sections For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 Mea surements and Result Displays on page 14 BURSTS IM EE 193 Channel Table TRIER 193 Code Doma
47. One power value per symbol is returned The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor With transmit diversity activated the number of values is reduced to half For details see Number of bits per symbol on page 40 Result Summary When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the results of the result summary are output in the following order lt PCG gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt Value Description Range Unit lt PCG gt Number of the PCG lt PTOTal gt Total power 7 dBm lt PPICh gt Pilot power 0 dBm lt RHO gt RHO 0 1 lt MACCuracy gt Composite EVM lt PCDerror gt Peak Code dB Domain Error lt ACTive gt Number of active channels lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to Frame Returns a 9 if the trigger is set to Free Run lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt IQOFfset gt IQ offset lt IQIMbalance gt IQ imbalance lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreadi
48. Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed UO Data File Format iq tar Element NumberOfChan nels Description Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 237 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch floa
49. Result Summary in window 2 INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard Retrieving Results INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Channel 8 32 is distributed to 8 64 and 40 64 in each case with half power 8dB 3dB 11 0 dB Result 6 0 7 0 1 6 Le 5 354 6 2 54 6 0 6 3 55 3 0 6 7 58 2 0 6 8 11 0 1 6 9 53 4 0 eis ei 6 24 9 0 SS E e SIUS 6 40 11 0 1 6 63 54 7 0 CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative BitReverse Channel 8 32 can now be directly read out with its total power The sort order changes in accordance with BitReverse Result 6 0 7 0 1 6 32 13 3 1 6 16 56 3 0 6 48 52 8 0 5 8 8 0 1 6 24 9 0 2 Ss 6 Ly T 371 Sec 6 63 54 7 0 INST SEL BC2K Activate cdma2000 BTS default is CDP relative in window 1 and Result Summary in window 2 INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Channel 8 32 is distributed to 8 64 and 40 64 in each case with half power 8dB 3dB 11 0dB Result Iler Oy 1 0 1 6 5 ly 1 3 1 6 2 54 6 0 6 3 55 3 0 iss Be 7 58 2 0 6 8 11 0 1 6 9 53 4 0 6 24 9 0 2 Less 732
50. Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 32 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the results of power measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 183 Suffix lt sb gt 1 2 3 4 5 irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower
51. Results power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel Value Description Range Unit code class code class of the channel see chapter 4 2 Channels Codes 2 7 BTS and Symbols on page 38 1 6 MS lt code number gt code number within the channel 0 127 BTS 0 63 MS lt signal level gt absolute or relative power depending on the setting dB or dBm See SENSe CDPower PREFerence Hadamard order power values for each code BitReverse order power values for combined channels lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 power of own antenna 2 alias power of own antenna 3 alias power of other antenna 4 alias power of own and other antenna o To avoid alias power set the base spreading factor correctly For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 191 Measurement Example Retrieving the Code Domain Power in the BTS Applica tion The example shows the results of the query for 5 channels with the following configura tion Chan type Ch no SF Code class Power PICH 0 64 6 7 0 dB PCH 1 64 6 7 3 dB CHAN 8 32 5 8 0 dB CHAN 24 128 7 9 0 dB alias with 24 64 SYNC 32 64 6 13 3 dB INST SEL BC2K Activate cdma2000 BTS default is CDP relative in window 1 and
52. SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 185 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 186 Starting a Measurement Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 186 Suffix n irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FPS application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 186 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote B
53. SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler NIT CONT OFF witches to single sweep mode NIT WAI tarts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the weep NST SEL IQ ANALYZER elects the IQ Analyzer channel NIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel DOHMH H Wa H Usage Event SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Querying the Status Registers Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 77 11 13 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the status registers specific to the CDMA2000 applica tions In addition the CDMA2000 applications also use the standard status registers of the R amp S FPS For details on the common R amp S FPS status
54. To seler konnte sich ect an RF measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Some parameters are set automatically according to the CDMA2000 standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type The parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measurement The main measurement configuration menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FPS User Manual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available via the Overview e Signal Channel Power Measurementt c c cccccceessscccceseseccceeeesesereenessaceecenesieeae 93 e Channel Power ACLR Measurement cc cccceccceceeeeenceeceeteeneeseeeeeneaeeeeneeneee 94 e Spectrum EMISSION MasK ccce itenim gate iaai haaat hi Eoi E nania 95 Occupied Bandwidth eet eta tte t re Cre enc e su xd 96 CCD cU 96 6 3 4 Signal Channel Power Measurements The Power measurement determines the CDMA2000 signal channel power To do so the RF signal power of a single channel is analyzed with 1 2288 MHz band wid
55. a normal marker General Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 104 See Marker Type on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 36 See Marker Peak List on page 36 See X value on page 104 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF General Analysis Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 104 See Marke
56. are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold The power values of the active and inactive channels are shown in different colors In addi tion codes with alias power can occur see Alias power on page 41 Table 3 5 Assignment of colors in CDEP result display Color Usage Red Selected channel code number Yellow Active channel Green Inactive channel Light blue Alias power of higher spreading factor Magenta Alias power as a result of transmit diversity Note If codes with alias power are displayed set the highest base spreading factor available in the Base Spreading Factor field It is not recommended that you select more detailed result displays such as Symbol Constell for unassigned or inactive codes since the results are not valid Remote command CDP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDPOrCALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDPR see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 CDEP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Composite Constellation In Composite Constellation evaluation the constellation points of the 1536 chips are displayed for the specified PCG This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assig
57. be configured per channel however several chan nels for CDMA2000 applications can be configured in parallel on the R amp S FPS Thus you can configure one channel for a Code Domain Analysis for example and another for a Power measurement for the same input signal Then you can use the Sequencer to perform all measurements consecutively and either switch through the results easily or monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FPS User Manual Selecting the measurement type When you activate a measurement channel in a CDMA2000 application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the CDMA2000 applica tions also provide other measurement types gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Result DIS BIA T 54 Code Doman ANAE d docere degen candle ce nen rari De indie ee 55 RF MOaSUremeMS HM 93 Result Display The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for CDMA2000 applications are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the follow
58. change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 91 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 167 Code Domain Analysis Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new measurement is performed Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new mea surement is performed Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 166 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 166 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 166 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptat
59. eene 233 AA Abbreviations 239 List of Remote Commands CDMA2000 241 i eH 245 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This User Manual provides all the information specific to the CDMA2000 applica tions All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FPS User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the CDMA2000 Measurements Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup How to Perform Measurements in CDMA2000 Applications The basic procedure to p
60. es MKR gt EEN eege dee de deed ege 107 Modulation ACCURACY E 22 Bits per symbol 1 eterne 40 Symbol constellation es 40 Type cores MS Mobile station MSR ACLR Results remote eterni eng 206 MSRA Analysis interval sssini 78 79 156 Operating MODES ertt erint 49 MSRA applications Capture OffSGL EE Capture offset remote MSRA Master RER LE 50 Multicarrier eier EE 61 63 137 Cartier detection tete 61 63 137 g i i ES 61 63 136 Filter types 61 63 136 gll rm P T 43 Keier 43 61 63 Multiple Measurement channels sssssesssss 11 54 Multiple ZOOIm Aessen ener rere 92 N W SC eu si ccce ts enar ere Rer si cao La eere te dcr th tet 108 Marker positioning 108 Next Peak er 108 Marker positlonilig uacua ctae 108 Noise ife 66 O OBW cdmaz2000 results reote rr ees 33 Configuring cdma2000 sse 96 Occupied bandwidth rez 33 OTfSeL i ect itt ned 16 Analysis interval si Frequency ios be tere ese Ice Eme n M emi Kd DR Lee 69 R f rence level Ae Ma messenger nroa 70 Optimizing Test Selup cuarta a ra tueueet cras Dx eame item ek ts 110 Options Electronic attenuation 2 ree 71 Preamplifier B24 2 ipee tete 72 Output Config latiOti EE 66 Configuration remote 142 Noise SOUFCe e ite 66 Power measurement Configuring en 93 E e EE 66 Ma M
61. for general channel detection described elsewhere CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 161 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 160 Remote commands exclusive to general channel detection SENSe GDPowerlGTReshold aiii icai esac enaudt ege en aident te p ao a ENEE a bEXU le A aAA 158 SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example CDP ICTR 50 Sets the Inactice Channel Threshold to 50 dB Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 81 Managing Channel Tables CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog niente tdt rnt nds 159 GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle G BY 2 2 2 2 2 emt terere etur eo iii eek eee ads 160 CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAbe DEI ete eene enne nnne nennen 160 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS ECTABIe RESTOFe uertice etna EENS 160 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect neces iaaa iaeia aaia 160 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe STATe essere nennen 161 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the instrument The first two result values are global va
62. gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 206 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth Occ BW and the frequency markers are displayed in the marker table mm EIN RN VCI QE RNC NN NUUS User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 33 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Ref Level 0 00 dBm s RBW Att 10 dB SWT ims VBW 3 1 Occupied Bandwidth CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 1 15 MHz Span 11 52 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Funetion Function Result Hi 1 2 09 GHz 27 37 dBm i 1 2 0 sHz 32 78 dBm 4 166073926 MHz T2 1 2 SH 33 12 dBr Remote command CONF CDP MEAS OBAN see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW See CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recor
63. if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 149 INPut EATT AUTO on page 149 INPut EATT on page 148 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 6 2 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 64 Preamplifier option B22 B24 Input Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If activated the input signal is amplified by 20 dB If option R amp S FPS B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FPS B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 147 6 2 5 3 Y Axis Scaling The vertical axis scaling is configurable In Code Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels Code Domain Analysis Amplitude Scale VA recite 0 0 dB hA Iul 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once Restore Scale e Ce l Code Domain Power Y Maximum Y MIDDUETL aes certi eee cy ere ra te Er eren rese qa Eod tata vrac eager coideaaatins 73 Auto Scale e EE 73
64. in the Release Notes R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Required units and accessories The measurements are performed with the following units and accessories e An R amp S FPS equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS or MS option e R amp S SMU signal generator equipped with option SMU B9 B10 B11 baseband gen erator and SMUK46 CDMA2000 incl 1xEVDV e 1 coaxial cable 50 Q approximately 1 m N connector e 2 coaxial cables 50 Q approximately 1 m BNC connector General Test Setup Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FPS Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation T Q RoHpEascHwaRz f TX signal Zee EBD The following val
65. includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers 11 1 After a short introduction to remote commands the tasks specific to CDMA2000 appli cations are described here e MM CUCU EE 124 COMMON OUITIXGS te rdc et t c e da catt Pe td aa ce bnt add ud t e potu 129 e Activating the Measurement Channel eie ee s 130 e Selecting a Measurement nanen aesennnn nnn nn nnee 133 e Configuring Code Domain Anahysis A 134 e Configuring RF Measuremelts uero error erede ee rd P een 172 e Configuring the Result Display 173 e Starting a Measurement seeec ena ntneze stunt te zh LaRRn enn ua RRR n tnn oaa RR n ana Ta Ra 182 e Rel ieving Resulls ciere eter t e d nee tu re xd 187 e General Analysis intei Loo EA EE ELA d a REP LR E FEAT Eee PRA 208 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 217 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 219 e Querying the Status Registers terrse nce Ere ouk El lene chon repa sa E Erud 221 e Commands for Combpsublliy 2 7 SCENE EE SNE 223 e Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measurements 224 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC
66. j ln nn ka ejo onno ojoon ojoo ooj ooa L LB B L L noaoo hooognoooocnooonooon mooognooonoooaoE 01 1000 101 1000 0111000 1111000 am0100 100100 0100100 4100100 010100 1010100 0110100 1110100 001100 1001100 0101100 4101100 0011100 1011100 0111100 11114100 m0100 10010 010010 1100010 mimi 1010010 011010 111010 unito 1001010 0101010 1101010 0011010 101 1010 0111010 4111010 mp0110 1000110 0100110 4100110 010110 1010110 0110110 4110110 001110 101110 0101110 1101110 011110 1011110 0111110 1114110 Fig 1 2 Code table for base spreading factor 128 part1 54 so iit 10 T4 42 406 26 so 58 122 70 38 102 22 96 Se 113 14 73 46 110 30 EL 52 126 Reference Code Tables Reference Supported Bandclasses HA DA MA RD AIR E nup 100 u 0n0 0n0 0u0n00unsg 1 DO 1 nuni 1 00000141000001 1000001 ES Ur OW 00 100100001 100001 33 Xni 1 o 0 g DO i 1 ga ug ood 1100001 37 wooo 1 000 1000010 001 mim 17 100101 1 000 10141010001 1010001 31 10010 1 000 1 100110001 011001 UE 1 000 i i i t f t o HH tf 1110001 113 i 1001000000100 1 m01 9 nipi 1 00 10041001001 1001001 73 1000 100 10 100 1010 001 0101001 D inii i OO t1 O 1 1 1 5 au BEE 4101001 105 101100 1 00 1100001107001 m1101 25 nii 1 00 110 fio 100 1 1011001 39 101110 1 00 11100111001 011101 ST WO 40 ON DOS OS O O 1 do 111101 121 iun 1 0100000000
67. lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer
68. n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker General Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace General Analysis CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 216
69. of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WIN
70. on page 135 Code Domain Analysis Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the frequency at which the passband of the RRC filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 135 6 2 3 2 MS Signal Description These settings describe the input signal in MS measurements Long Code Long Code Mask Long Code Offset Koe kao Ae a Ee ESG 101 Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency ORG Gode Mask tr tret O NANO 62 Long Code OffGet oes eife i tL re Here d diane 63 Long Code Generation 63 lte 63 L Enhanced Zeene EENEG 63 Mi ie uu Ba NEED NER 63 BEIDE o NEQU MEO E NE p ER 63 a do 64 in Off RAV NP 64 Long Code Mask Defines the long code mask of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF For the default mask value of 0 the Long Code Offset is not taken into consideration Code Domain Analysis For more information on long codes see Long code scrambling on page 42 Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe MASK on page 138 Long Code Offset Defines the long code offset i
71. on page 160 Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Channel tables are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box 0 For details on channel table entries see chapter 6 2 9 4 BTS Channel Details on page 84 or chapter 6 2 9 5 MS Channel Details on page 86 Mi O EEEE 84 evi m 84 Adding a CRANO uut et tonta ta ec mtt e ta ttd ex o eeu 84 Deleting a Chanie DEE 84 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 84 Code Domain Analysis SOMO NS KC 84 Cancelling the Copnfouratton aa 84 SAE o L E A A E E eden 84 Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefined Channel Tables list Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 164 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent on page 161 Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to define another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measurement data Remote command
72. on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 154 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 154 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 155 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 154 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUT
73. page 210 7 4 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box R amp S FPS K82 K83 Analysis m x Range Marker Table Code Domain Settings off Trace Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Marker Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 213 7 4 3 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab nthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab T User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 106 7 4 4 Markers Analysis Mar
74. page 79 11 5 10 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower SLOT numeric value This command selects the slot PCG to be analyzed Parameters numeric value Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Manual operation See Power Control Group on page 101 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for Code Domain Analysis are described here SENSe CDPowetr NORMAalize 5 12 21 2 2 2 02 222 12 ca LE to pevse ea eva vL eee p RR T oA EAR 169 E Ee Ree EE 169 IGENGe ICDbower PDlGplay eene enne senes enirn nene rere i nins 170 ie ell EE 170 SENSe CDPowerPREPFO6LfenCce n cuocere ctun eoe etae Pee a a ee kou haasi Pa EEN 170 SEN Se CUP OWES FACOR pM 171 SENSe GDPower TPMedas 2 irte cd netter rex totae ten Ben Da aom ene e SE Fee En ERE RR 171 SENSe CDPower NORMalize State If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP NORM ON Activates the elimination of the I Q offset Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 99 SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sortin
75. registers refer to the description of remote commands basics in the R amp S FPS User Manual CH RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains information on the error situa tion in the code domain analysis of the cdma2000 applications The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 222 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 222 Table 11 7 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for CDMA2000 applications Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the applica tion Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level e Incorrectly set PN Offset e Incorrectly set values for Swap IQ Invalid signal at input 2to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 HR Ee e de EC KE 222 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CON DJOR nies ctore nra rna R aan h ann saepe qn anna 222 STATus QUEStionable GvhNCENAble 222 STATus QUESHonable S Y NGO NTRAnSIHOD 2 oan dently cadets aree pede Goatees toners 222 STATUs QUEStonable SYNC PTRarisltlofi 5 2 9 2 2 2 2 SERA 223 Querying the Status Registers STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters
76. required and used as power reference Transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH 16 128 not allowed 2 Transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH 16 128 required and used as power ref erence Pilot channel F PICH 0 64 not allowed No diversity Pilot channel F PICH 0 64 required and used as power reference Transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH 16 128 required R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics 4 8 Channel Detection and Channel Types The CDMA2000 applications provide two basic methods of detecting active channels e Automatic search using pilot sequences The application performs an automatic search for active DPCH channels through out the entire code domain At the specific codes at which channels can be expec ted the application detects an active channel if the corresponding symbol rate and a sufficiently high power level is measured see Inactive Channel Threshold on page 81 Any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate is considered to be a data channel In the MS application a channel is considered to be active if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel e Comparison with predefined channel tables The input signal is compared to a predefined channel table All channels that are included in the predefined channel table are considered to be active For a list of predefined channel tables provided by the CDMA2000 applications see
77. result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the PCGs and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the refer ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot chan nel is active Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FPS 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FPS to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FPS TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD cdma2000 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo a F o m DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt cdma2000 BT
78. rint rr nre en ter rrr rere hr the e PY ERR hn 152 TRIGger SEQuernce BEVeLIOPOWSLE E 152 TRIGger SEQuerice E E EVel REBPOWSF e rrt totem eer et ent teer ere en RR ERR 152 TRIGger SEQuence D EVel VID6oO ertt tene nr rt hit titre eder hr reor 152 TRIGger SEQuernce EEVel EXTernnalsporte a cuc ease epi ner en epe i orent neta tnb nera terea 151 Re ee EE ene Re E TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Index A Abbreviations asocio doa RATE CD EIS XR ELE 239 Aborting e E 89 AC DC coupling ACKO M ACLR Bandclasses 5 2 ccena 95 96 172 232 cdma2000 results 31 Configuring cdma2000 Results remote cierres Activating cdma2000 measurements remote e en Ei socer oe tees el E EE Adjacent channel leakage ratio e EN Agilent Long code generation mode er 42 Alias POWER emgoen eroe RO Ye et a venda Amplitude Configuration Configuring remote m fere Analysis BIS Code Domain Settings tree 98 Remote commands RF remote RF measurements funere Me Analysis interval MSIRA sis tee Antenna diversity Activating Activating remote ies SPEClal Channels zicusicescassvssnecsscsuccecactsoaradesenaiennseiensbes 44 Antenna number SEIS DE 60 Selecting remote essssse 137 Applications Adopted parameters sciet ere n rd ires 55 Switching
79. selected measurement is activated with the default settings for CDMA2000 immediately 3 If necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FPS User Manual 4 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 5 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 7 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To select the application data for MSRA measurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Mas ter in the CDMA2000 BTS application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in anothe
80. sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter R amp S FPS K82 K83 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FPS Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a
81. spreading factor is re assigned dynamically in certain time intervals according to the current demand of users and data to be transmitted The higher the spreading factor the lower the data rate the lower the spreading factor the higher the data rate A channel with a lower spreading factor consists of several combined codes That means a channel can be described by its number and its spreading factor The spread bits are called chips Since a PCG is a fixed time unit knowing the symbol rate you can calculate how many symbols are transmitted for each PCG For evaluations which display symbols on the x axis the maximum number of symbols varies according to the symbol rate of the selected code channel With transmit diver sity signals the symbols of the signal are distrubuted on two antennas see chap ter 4 7 2 Antenna Diversity on page 44 Therefore the symbol number is reduced to half The following table shows the relationship between the code class the spreading fac tor the number of codes per channel and the symbol rate Table 4 1 Relationship between various code parameters for CDMA2000 BTS signals Code Spreading No Symbol rate ksps Symbols per PCG Symbols per PCG class factor codes no transmit diver transmit diversity channel sity 2 4 128 307 2 384 192 3 8 64 153 6 192 96 4 16 32 76 8 96 48 5 32 16 38 4 48 24 6 64 8 19 2 24 12 7 128 4 9 6 12 6
82. the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured SS a User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 35 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Bandwidth Offset Power 1 229 M 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 106 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 Mi 600 0 kHz 1 m V 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 211 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the
83. the line lies outside the interval User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 50 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics 1 Code Domain Power 1 Cirw 3 Symbol EVM Analysis Interva valysis Interval Code 0 4 Code Code 68 Symb 0 Symb 23 2 Power vs Symbol Symb 0 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual SSS aT User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 51 Import Export Functions 5 1 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FPS later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FPS or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit
84. the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power vs PCG Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Power PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel Which pilot channel is used as reference depends on the antenna diversity for details see SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 137 command TOTal The reference power is the total power of the signal RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 100 Example CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power Manual operation See Power Reference on page 100 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the base spreading factor If the base spreading factor of 64 is used for channels with a spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power is dis played in the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power diagrams For more information see chapter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 Parameters lt SpreadingFactor gt 64 128 RST 64 Example CDP SFAC 128 Selects base spreading factor 128 Manual operation See Base Spreading Factor on page 99 SENSe CDPower TPMeas State This command activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the channels to the pilot The results are queried using the TRAC DATA CTAB command or the CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES command Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 11 6
85. total power of the signal Pilot Power Shows the power of the pilot channel If antenna 2 is selected the power of the F TDPICH is displayed in all other cases that of the F PICH For details on antenna selection refer to Antenna Diversity Antenna Number on page 60 RHO Shows the quality parameter RHO According to the CDMA2000 standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally gen erated reference signal When RHO is measured the CDMA2000 standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and the ideal refer ence signal For further details refer to the Composite EVM result display IQ Imbalance Shows the IQ imbalance of the signal in 96 Offset Shows the IQ offset of the signal in 96 Channel results In the Result Summary channel results of the selected channel and the selected PCG are displayed In the Channel Table channel results for all channels are displayed For details see Channel Table on page 18 Not all channel results displayed in the Result Summary are also displayed in the Channel Table and vice versa Table 3 3 Channel specific parameters Parameter Description Channel Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Modulation Type Mapping BTS application only Displays the modulation type o
86. trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 209 7 4 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example e Individual Marker Seltlllits uc cron crt ort tent tet a td c taa 103 e General En e enr etica beca raten eet bentur ee 105 e Marker Search Gettngs AA 106 e Marker Positioning P WTellols codi rtt cbr cere citt ett tue 107 7 4 4 Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Settings All Marker Off ea 1 Code Domain Power Marker SBlecred MORE EE 104 Tt Tt EE 104 Pc TE 104 aui cio rrp ren 105 All Markers GE 105 Selected Marker Marker name The marke
87. trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD cdma2000 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo a N o wm DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET MODE gt cdma2000 BTS AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG gt External Trigger 1 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Composite EVM Window 2 N Oo a B o Ww AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In the second window the Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measure ment including the values for the Composite EVM Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 10 6 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FPS In the I Q plane the error vec tor represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the
88. 1101 01 1010 011011 011100 011101 011110 011111 00000 00001 010010 010001 1 0100100 0100101 0100110 0100111 010101 0101010 0101014 0101100 0101101 0101110 0101111 011000 011001 011010 0110011 0110100 0110101 0110110 0110111 011100 011101 0111010 0111011 0111100 0111101 0111110 0111111 ln ns zk a lk iHa aoaaa aao aaja ao ojo oaao oj j alo of se jooo ojo oo ojoo ooj ooa joo oojo oo ofj as jo oo ojo oo oj lt lt j jo oo ojo o o gj alos joo ooj ooa jo oo oj jo o o of jo o o oj jo o o of jo o o oj jo o o oj jo o o oj jo ooo DI Blo o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj D oj o ofj o of o oj o oj D oj oo soso os oo el fe oo so gt of sf os eo ee o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o ofj o oj o ofj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o o ooj D oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj oo jo oo oj jo oo of jo o o oj jo oo of jo oo ofj jo o o of jo oo oj jo ooo nn Hjo no oojo oo ofj jo oo ojo oao oj jo oo ojoo o gj len joo ooj ooo lt j ns oles zl e loop joao oa aja oao ojo oao ofj
89. 127 Obsolete Optional keywords Parameters ug SUIfIXGS 5 6 Geet eee Restoring Chanhnel settings iere Predefined channel tables Result displays CDA TEE 17 Channel Bitstream s sorsi iiinn 18 Code Domain Error Power 20 Code Domain Power 2 Composite Constellation seesseess 21 Composite EVM rnnt 22 Configuring 54 Configuring remote 173 Diagram a89 Marker table i50 Peak Code Domain Error 24 Peak lista beet e eret e Pee etia tat 36 POoWer Me PGG A istese arrari ireann Er eii EEEa 26 Power vs Symbolinen deed 27 Result Summary 27 36 see also Evaluations sess 14 Symbol Constellation Ld Symbol ARTE 28 Result Summary Channel results 2 deterret 16 Evaluation method 27 36 General Results 2 iege ritas 15 PCG results 15 Result display 44 90 Hl Le erac tea ees toe er ocor eer ede 203 Results Calculated remote AAA CDP remote Data format remote Evaluating Exporting remote Retrieving remote RE remote rre de Cen pera Tr ce remote x cete ener edi Trace data remote Trace data query remote sss 192 193 Updating the display remote ssssse 220 Retri
90. 134 11 6 Configuring RF Measurements eese enne nennen nennen nn 172 11 7 Configuring the Result Display essen nnn nnns 173 11 8 Starting a Measurerment 5 sciccccccctcccecsccstececes scotia ces cssceeececcuuee ces saaaeeecascnaueeecacnsatoees 182 11 9 Retrieving ReSUNtS witisic ccicccecscssccccccsscceececesscteccessssccecessssecescesasscteccoosseteececsesteecedeasveeees 187 11 10 General Analy SiS wiiiiscc scccccccscsscececcsssceccccasscceccecsseteecessesteeccssassctecsssescteecensssteeestsasectesss 208 11 11 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eee 217 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 219 11 13 Querying the Status Registers eeeeeseseeeeeenene nnne nens 221 11 14 Commands for Compatibility eese nennen nnns 223 11 15 Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measurements 224 A Annex Reference Data ccccsseeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceeneeeeeeeeeees 227 A 1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables eene 227 A 2 Reference Code Tables seeeseseeeeen eene nnne nnne nnn nnne nnns 229 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 4 A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses sese eene 232 AA VQ Data File Format iq tar eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeen
91. 2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range in the specified sub block PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range in the specified sub block OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only General Analysis Manual operation See Power on page 30 See Channel Power ACLR on page 31 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 32 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 33 See CCDF on page 34 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measu
92. 32 and 26 32 each with one quarter of the power 10dB 6dB 16 0dB CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative BitReverse Q Sorting is changed according to BitReverse Result Bue 0 952 3 3 5 16 957 3 0 5 5 8 9556 3 0 3 2 10 0 1 5 6 255 33 0 5 3l1 951 7 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive since PICH is set to I Channel 2 8 can now be read out directly with its total power CDP OVER ON Activate Overview mode CDP relative on window 1 I branch CDP relative on window 2 Q branch TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative of I branch Result EL bg Oy FT 053 5 416 752 3 0 Lb Bt sus 5 2 49 0 3 5 18 49 0 3 7553105 49 0 3 5 26 49 0 3 by 6 255 3 07 5 6 53 4 0 D 3l1 751 7 0 PICH is active Codes of channel 2 8 are quasi inactive TRAC TRACE2 Read out CDP relative of Q branch Result Bue 0j9552 3 3 6 16 57 3 0 5 5 87756530 3 2 10 0 1 6 3 955 30 5731751 de 11 9 3 5 Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each chip are transferred Re chipo Im chipo Re chip gt Im chip Re chip gt Im chips The number of value pairs corresponds to the chip number of 1536 chips in a power control group Retrieving Results 11 9 3 6 Composite EVM RMS When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one pair of PCG and level val
93. 95 MHz 4 4 Korean PCS Band 5 5 450 MHz NMT Band 6 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band 7 7 700 MHz Band 8 8 1800 MHz Band 9 9 900 MHz Band 10 10 Secondary 800 MHz 11 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band 12 12 800 MHz PAMR Band 13 13 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band 14 14 US PCS 1 9 GHz Band 15 15 AWS Band 16 16 US 2 5 GHz Band 17 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band AA VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the Source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage A 4 1 Q Data File Format iq tar of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained files An iq
94. A operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 220 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 154 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 154 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are ava
95. ALL rr tret error en etr nn tena 186 Jl RE BIEN 184 INPO ow RESTO IUE TEE 148 JS IN RK LTE AUTO ME 148 Jl Diere llo dy ur RAST DRITTE ly doge a o M Ea INPut EATT AUTO os INPUEEAT TS WAV Essenen re Ee b aare e E Oera A EENE Eba ER AEE SONEN RETER INPutEIETer dE RE VE 141 ll Del RRE 147 NEE EE geed 141 IN PUES ui i re e 142 JET ale EI BUR EE 130 INSTrument CREate REPLace as INSTr ment Charel NEW eege hr e n tn ret eere err nnne repente dee i epa INS Tr moeht RI EE INS KU Ion HIS c BE 131 INS Trimet RENAME sirsa eb eae cn dtt tp gta e ve endure tbc a td eed e oed 132 INSTr ment SELectl i iir rrr prr tnra rera HR EENS CHR ERROR ENEDE EKC NED NSSE ge 133 LAYOUTADD EWINDOW 174 LAYout CATalog WINDow 176 LAY out IDENUISVDEWINDOW ccrta eee aeaa aciei dea rre rece er rre rere e E WEE ei 176 geen EE Nee EE 177 hg ere Ee WINDOW tnter a e xri enne nerd rtr ne repre ee 177 LAYout SPLitter o 5 9 de UM Ee EE D E 179 LAYOUt WINDOW N gt RI EE 179 RN Al Te EN Ge 179 EAYouUtWINDOwsn REPLACO terii traer teat orar nas Te xen ESI aes SS Re s AA AE ESENE 180 MMEMory EOAD IQ S TA Te tt hra tert ren p eere ee e EAE re n re eene aen 217 MMEMOGry STOReSshP IO COMMEN sonaires aaie na EE NEIER EEEE 218 MMEMo
96. BTS application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 6 2 8 Application Data MSRA on page 79 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual 6 2 8 Code Domain Analysis Sample Ral deret a dde ned reed neon y e e Dr d Geis 79 DAV GRU O M EE 79 n iUlaqorsiio1gl FOGS MR 79 Number of EE 79 SIR DEM 79 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 5 33333 MHz indicated for reference only Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 156 Number of PCGs Sets the number of PCGs you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the PCGs The maximum capture length is 64 The default value is 3 If the Number of Sets on page 79 to capture is larger than 1 the number of PCGs is always 64 For more information on PCGs and sets see chapter 4 1 PCGs and Sets on page 38 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 156 Number of Sets Defines the number of consecutive sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s IQ memory The possible value range is from 1 to a maximum of 1500 BTS applica tion or 810 MS application sets The default setting is 1 If you capture more than one set the number of slots PCGs is always 64 CDMA2000 BTS application 32 and is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page
97. CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz Manual operation See Cut Off Frequency on page 62 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off factor for the RRC filter Parameters RollOffFactor Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Manual operation See Roll Off Factor on page 61 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for multicarrier measure ments Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements Manual operation See Multicarrier Filter on page 61 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multicarrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS Example
98. Cute on page 133 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 54 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal e EIER TE 59 e MS Signal Descriptioki ees een dr dap tuer Ee te ket te e re eee 62 BTS Signal Description These settings describe the input signal in BTS measurements Code Domain Analysis PN Offset PN Offset 0 for external Trigger only Antenna Diversity Antenna Number Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency PAN RO CI EE 60 Antenna Diversity Antenna NUMD Q ccccteseececeeeseeecneeetseecccenteseececeesteceeetensanene 60 Oger 61 L Enhanced Algortbm 61 Ei ui dai DE M 61 Bic a MONTE 61 B tt aaiauanuadearamed atest 61 Ee reg 0 62 PN Offset Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset
99. Domain Error Power vs PCG Traces e Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 168 T 3 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Traces r Write e Ce Cl 1 Code Domain Power In CDA evaluations only one trace can be active in each diagram at any time Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the settings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures Markers View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected
100. Dow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 126 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segme
101. Ee ET Symbol EVM sissors Evaluation method Trace results ico ta t e e reta Symbol Magnitude Error Evaluatior ire Hte t Od bets 29 Symbol Phase Error BUT e 29 Symbol rate Display Relationship to code class isisisi 39 Relationship to spreading factor 39 Symbols Constellatloit tege Nesen ec eub Number per PCG POWOI cendo pce E eer E abe ds Synchronization Reference frequencies 2 ener 118 T TDPICH SONKEY ee DT 109 Test setup COMMECHONS uinci pet e n e e 48 Equipment i oot tio rideo Dro Soter cna los a 48 Presettings acit metro reicht testem ci Cae 49 Threshold Active channels eapite ASA 81 158 Timing Offset ceci eerta mer cett 16 19 Calculating EE 99 171 Results remote 188 191 x uua ME 193 Title bar WINDOW MM EAT 13 Traces Configuration softkey Configuring remote Exporting remote Mode seve E Mode remote inen RR Results remote Transmit diversity e retten SEO Number of symbols rtt etn Fequired channels trn Trigger Adjusting Measurement example 120 CDP Measurement example sse 119 Configuration remote iiinis 149 Configuration softkey A 73 Bropsout tile eerte ttr irren 76 External remote 153 Holdoff T6 Hysteresis al rcp 76 iei
102. Erin tee Next peak remote control ssessse Peak ates eben teet Peak remote control Positioning Querying position remote Search settings Setting to PIG Fleece ined eer eee dete eit ead Setting to MD PIS uicit nns rtt oe tto eee tes Settings remote Slate eege TADIS eese ttes Table evaluation method bak MY PO TEE Maximizing Windows remote ien e torii thm lena 174 Maximum NaS heen teste dscns etes Gri io eset deene eier 73 Measurement channel Activating remote eerte rents 130 Creating remote Deleting remote Duplicating remote A Querying remote Renaming remote Replacing remote Measurement examples ep Center frequency deviation eessssss 118 Composite EVM iet ntn cbr e ctiain Frequency error PODE RHO TAC OR eT SEM itte d Signal channel power Synchronization Trigger offset Triggered CDP zu Wrong PN OSet ET Measurement time te E EE EN Measurements Results remote fcc iene eg 188 RE eee Nees HeLa tend dei Eder 30 Selecting 94 59 Selecting Temole sr e ra rente ey esent 133 Starting remote 6 ences 182 TYPOS 14 Minimum v i Marker positlonihg reris eret EES 108 EE TEE 108 boo M
103. G PISS SIS CUR EE 65 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 142 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FPS can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 140 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FPS can be set to 50 O or 75 OQ 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 70 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 141 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FPS Code Domain Analysis An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximu
104. In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FPS performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 91 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FPS performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FPS determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FPS determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FPS uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 166 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 91 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 91 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 167 command the
105. K FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Result Summary The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details on the displayed values see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 15 2 Result Summary General Results Ser oy PCG Results Set 0 7 PCG POY Channel Results Ch 0 643 Fig 3 12 Result Summary result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated symbols of the selected channel and the selected PCG The BTS application supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation types The modulation type itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 4 8 1 BTS Channel Types on page 45 for further information Note QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis mum PIN RN CS QE RN MC NN NUUS User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 27 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Symbol Constellation 1 Clrw Fig 3 13 Symbol Constellation display for the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 6 min to 384 max depen
106. M is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an ade quate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES MACCuracy see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the selected slot The magnitude error is calculated as the difference of the magnitude of the received signal to the magnitude of the reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent ei009 N 2560 kelo N 1 MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE 1 Magnitude Error vs Chip Chip 0 256 hip Fig 3 7 Magnitude Error vs Chip display for CDMA2000 BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1
107. NP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 20 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B22 B24 on page 72 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11 5 3 3 Configuring the Attenuation INSTA Ee 148 INPutATTenaalon AU TO cree t ene ne etae enean teo deas Ense atn e dnce EE EE 148 lj ndzuwge E EMISIT 148 INPUREA up o 149 NPU EAT TES TANT over atender ple e eee docs dile d vaa due exu desque edet e qe e cL oc e 149 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see 1NPut EATT STATe on page 149 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 71 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is chan
108. Ne VALUe niii orn tn er nhi tetra nieve reri rre eoa 219 GALCulatesn E RTE ENEE 220 IT e TER Ee E 208 GALGulatesn NIT POWEE ro tnnc rrr zea POVI a TEN ERO LEER REN E EAR 145 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDoGlass eene enne nnne tnter EREA 172 GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle CATalog ott ertt tene n e rne rents 159 GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABlIe COMMBnt entrer retten nire eine ENa 161 eelere ler RI TE AER e CORY EE CONFigure CDPower BTS C TABle DATA ter tnnt rn a GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle DATA oi nr rrt ir e rene phe roin Rina CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME ttr trt rrt e ron rn ner rr en n ern CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore GONFigure CDPower BTS G TABIE SEL CC bs iio otra reni ert aene erp sepe as e ea tiras CONFigure CDPower BTS C TABle S TATe oett eer teret ttn CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency sseeseeeeeeeenee nennen 135 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARtier FILTer ROFF ieeeee eene rennen tnn rn ten nne ra nein ona 135 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FlLTer TYPE ee COhNFioure CDbowert BITGtMC Aber Ter GTATel nennen 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MGAR rerMALGO ratto nate rt erreur ae regen pe yere eek eu P ETEEN 137 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier S TATe rrt rn tre e nne re rore nep 137 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement
109. Put TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 155 6 2 5 6 2 5 1 Code Domain Analysis Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 155 Frontend Settings The frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Floquency Sgligs EE 68 e Amplitude Settings uu o ttn ee ueri obe ePi ELI Ren ad area eleanor 69 e TAN SCANT DE 72 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box Frequency GZ 13 25 GHz Center Frequenc Stepsize Value Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz Ier 68 Center Frequency Gtepelze An 69 Pregueney mic T 69 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency
110. R amp SSFPS K82 K83 CDMA2000 Measurements User Manual able Walsh Syris F ksp RC Sta 192 IQ Offset ChannelResults Ch 18 32 Power ve Measuring 1176 8539 02 03 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FPS models with firmware version 1 30 and higher R amp S FPS4 1319 2008K04 R amp S FPS7 1319 2008K07 R amp S FPS13 1319 2008K13 R amp S FPS30 1319 2008K30 R amp S FPS40 1319 2008K40 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FPS K82 1321 4156 02 e R amp S FPS K83 1321 4162 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG CDMA2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association TIA USA Trade names are trademarks of the owners The followi
111. RIGH MECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power for all codes Thus the error between the measure ment signal and the ideal reference signal is projected onto the code domain at a spe cific base spreading factor In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected PCG is highlighted red You can select the Base Spreading Factor and the number of evaluated PCGs in the Signal Capture settings see Number of PCGs on page 79 MS application the error is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q 1 Peak Code Domain Error LPCG Fig 3 8 Peak Code Domain Error display for the BTS application Note Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal refer ence signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result display therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain SS a aa User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 24 Code Domain Analysis reliable meas
112. S Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG gt External Trigger 1 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Peak Code Domain Error Window 1 mm RP o AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In the second window the Result Summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FPS always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the Result Summary by default in the second win dow Introduction 11 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Mea surements d The following commands are required to perform measurements in CDMA2000 appli cations in a remote environment It assumes that the R amp S FPS has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FPS User Manual In particular this
113. S BCLass BANDocClass eeecisiiiseseseei eee asa hase n inani 172 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corre sponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the CDMA2000 standard Parameters lt Bandclass gt For an overview of available bandclasses and the corresponding parameter values see chapter A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses on page 232 RST 0 Configuring the Result Display Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Manual operation See Bandclass on page 95 11 6 2 Analysis for RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for Some special marker functions which are not available in the CDMA2000 applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual 11 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 14 e General Window Commands uode tn Da eee xn n dle c eus 173 e Working with Windows in the Display
114. S UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 217 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 218 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 218 Result Display 6 Configuration 6 1 The CDMA2000 applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the CDMA2000 standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the CDMA2000 standard the CDMA2000 applications offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Only one measurement type can
115. This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FPS to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FPS The R amp S FPS automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultT ype gt This command reads trace data from the R amp S FPS For details on reading trace data for other than code domain measurements refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description 11 9 3 Retrieving Results Query parameters lt ResultType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of the corresponding trace in the speci fied measurement window The results of the trace data query depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command The individual results are described in chapter 11 9 3
116. Transmit Diversity Pilot CHannel F SYNC 32 64 BPSK Synchronization channel F CHAN BPSK RC 1 2 active data channel QPSK RC 3 5 INACTIVE inactive channel F PDCCH QPSK Packet Data Control CHannel F PDCH 32 QPSK 8PSK Packet Data CHannel or 16 QAM In addition the following channel types can be defined in a predefined channel table for the CDMA2000 BTS application Channel type Ch no SF Description F APICH BPSK Auxiliary Pilot CHannel F ATDPICH BPSK Auxiliary Ttransmit Diversity Pilot CHannel F BCH QPSK Broadcast CHannel F CACH QPSK Common Assignment Channel F CCCH QPSK Common Control CHannel F CPCCH QPSK Common Power Control CHannel o Channel table definition for transmit diversity In a measurement scenario with two antennas transmit diversity the following condi tions apply to the channel table definition e Antenna 1 is used for transmission The pilot channel F PICH must be included The pilot channel of antenna 2 F TDPICH must not be included e Antenna 2 is used for transmission The pilot channel of antenna 2 F TDPICH must be included The pilot channel F PICH must not be included Both antennas are used for transmission The pilot channel F PICH must be included The pilot channel of antenna 2 F TDPICH must be included 4 8 2 MS Channel Types The following channel types can be detected in CDMA2000 MS signals
117. a 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 O 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 QI01 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TILLY Olly iy Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 HD QUIZ TE Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 LIES Gti t2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 1I21 QI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10oat32 fwrite fid single imag iq k f10at32 en
118. ad 29 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays Bitstream The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel over a selected PCG All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid using dashes 2 Bitstream Tabl Fig 3 1 Bitstream result display for the BTS application To select a specific symbol press the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list The number of symbols per PCG depends on the spreading factor symbol rate and the antenna diversity The number of bits per symbol depends on the modulation type For details see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 38 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM CDP BSTR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power measurement over the selected PCG The analysis results for all channels are displayed Thus the Channel Table may contain up to 128 entries corre sponding to the highest base spreading factor of 128 The first entries of the table indicate the channels that must be available in the signal to be analyzed and any other control channels PICH SYNC etc The lower part of the table indicates the data channels that are contained in the signal If the typ
119. aiii e iei ee bebe bes aue ent edad 10 E d 79 156 le Mitte 16 Results remote nett tibns 188 IQ offset Eliminating atro tir teet em Eod Results remote K Keys EE 55 LINES es 55 c o S 107 MKR FUNCT iiiter ener pad oceanus 55 Peak Search 108 RUN CONI RE 89 RUN SINGLE Aender Edge PORRO 89 SPAN 55 L Lines Meng E suse 55 ONG CODES E 42 Agilent signals rene re ener rrr tr rne 42 Generation 42 63 Generation remote rie nme 139 MASK 62 Mask emite pe tod tenet ra 138 Offset ug eee Offset remote z Sora mD MEET Low pass filter MultiCatrigr rassas rtt mtt ei ege Lower Level Hysteresis ttn 91 Mag Error vs Chip Evaluation oco sere onte Pete ER Nen 23 Mapping E 16 19 42 Ghannel table 2 to tn eorr each m 88 163 UO branches e xui E 193 Selecting enti iicet enean 101 168 Marker Functions Men s asteon Domi erer 55 Marker table elt le Ui a DE 105 Evaluation method iss seri tte erre ree tex 36 Markers elt le ia WE Configuring remote Configuring softkey Deactivating Delta markers MINIMUM soos oot rennen Minimum remote control sseeeees Next plpiboblYisucuen coo coe ns irte rior E deet Next minimum remote control Next peak ete ertet Ero Eten ona ra
120. al operation See UO Export on page 53 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the CDMA2000 BTS application the application data range is defined by the same commands used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 156 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the 3GPP FDD BTS measurement The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAL Culatesn gt MSRA ALING SHOW aie uiii ena ettet ea to denota neo ite venezia 219 CALCulate n MSRA ALINe VALUe 2 22 orae cruza ai catum a ta ai 219 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt p gt MAL 220 MEE BEE 220 ISENSe TMSRA GAPT NEE 220 CALCulate
121. all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 237 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754
122. alysis When you activate a CDMA2000 application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation signal source and digital UO input settings input coupling After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a CDMA2000 application is activated or after a Preset Channel The following default settings of the Code Domain Analysis are activated Table 6 1 Default settings for CDMA2000 channels Parameter Value Common CDMA2000 settings Digital standard CDMA 2000 MC1 where MC1 stands for Multi carrier 1 and thus describes CDMA2000 1X i e a single carrier Measurement Code Domain Analysis Bandclass BC 0 800 MHz Cellular Band Sweep CONTINUOUS Channel detection mode AUTOSEARCH Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Threshold value 60 dB 6 2 2 CR EI Ee Overview Code Domain Analysis Parameter Value Number of PCGs 3 Number of Sets 1 PCG number 0 Code number 0 Code Order Hadamard Evaluations Window 1 Code Domain Power Relative Window 2 Result Summary BTS specific settin
123. ameter values remote sss 157 ettievihg ie reete 193 Special BTS 2 45 Special MS 47 happert dae Ege e Ee e lette 38 Active 15 81 86 88 158 163 Bandwidth 2 2 2 cire rd dde Gd uam 38 Bitstream iL ene atender pado depu dts 18 Evaluation range 101 168 Inactive SHOWING cioe eres Eden EE 19 Number siisii 90 Res lts 16 Selected Display since nee De etes 13 SEH Stee Eed Threshold ET Chip Rate Error Results remote o ENEE Closing Channels remote ire tiens 131 Windows remote A 177 179 Code class Relationship to spreading factor 39 Relationship to symbol rate siisii 39 Code Display Order 100 169 Cod6e dOrmmalli EE 38 Code Domain Analysis LE 14 Code Domain Error Power S66 ED E EE E E eter m td ea aa 20 Code Domain Power See GDP D 20 Code domain settings leni 98 Code number see Charinelinumber recorte eto 38 Selecting Code Power Display rrr 170 Code tables 3 5 iren re t 229 Codes 38 Long 2 42 Mapping 2 42 Number per channel 5 99 Power display 22499 TELE E 45 ij e EE Sorting D SOrtinNg Ordet EE 20 Complementary cumulative distribution function see GODEF aen Ga ate dead 34 Composite Constellation Evaluation method epe et 21 Trace desulls
124. arker lt m gt MINiIMUM RIGHTL AA CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmumfPEART sees 217 CAL Culatesmn2 DEE Tamarkerstis X iere eire oris HER Exe eon AE A essere Mene EE NOLA 212 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative eg GAL GCulate r DEETamarkerstr Y 2 eei rcr esae rri et erbe ce ue erect E Dn En ceu GALCulatesn DEL KENE EECHER KE CALG latesn gt EE een GT EE 206 GALCulatesmn gt MARKer lt im gt iAOF Ris E 210 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUIt esses 188 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer ssb RESUIt sse 206 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TDPlIch CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimuM LEF T ipao ct it Actress ce reete rette beber e ette ka VR EOM LEY CAL CGulate nz MAbkercmz MA Nimum NENT CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MAXIMUM RIG Fissret n iA E CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimuUm NEX T acciaio certet creep i e S CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMIARIG tases cioe onec corte Etro ecce ee eai dr va Cea Ero Y CAL Culate nzMAhRkercmMiNimumfPEART AA GAL en e Te EE 211 GAL Gulatesn MARKersm e 190 e e sae rei C nPIRCRPAI IE 210 GALGulatesn MSRA ALING SHOW trt rente tn ttr d Pe a nnne XXE XXE RENS 219 GALGCulatesn MSRA ALI
125. asics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Starting a Measurement Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequ
126. asurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram In cdma2000 applications only 4 markers per window can be config ured for Code Domain Analysis e individual Marker Settings nente ceu te et ik Eee Ei EE Ec RET Re Ez 210 General Marker Selttihgs tite eme t ERR RAE intra E ERR E SIR RR RM RDRUE 213 e Positioning the Marker Ae 213 Individual Marker Settings CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzAOEtE 210 CALCulatesmsMARKersmo S AT aad entro e petet ert ttt tob cob epa 210 CAL e DEL E 211 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzAOEE nicicand anaia i nanan aE inaa 211 CAL Culate nz DE TamarkercmztSTATel enne nennen trn nnne 211 eALCulatesms DELTamalkersmys9X ualet eterne none edi aia eda terne aine ke 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative 212 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN rakei aa ani aaau hinia a 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into
127. at a wider area of the code domain is taken into consideration for example when calculating the power level than the code actually occupies The excess power calculated due to a false spreading factor is referred to as alias power mum PIN VC QE NN MC NN UU User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 41 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics 4 4 4 5 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes Short code scrambling Base stations use a pseudo noise PN sequence also referred to as short code sequence to scramble the data during transmission The used PN sequence is circula ted in fixed time intervals A specified PN offset value determines the start phase for the short code sequence The PN parameter is unique for each base station Thus the signals from different base stations can be distinguished quickly by the CDMA2000 BTS application if the PN Offset is defined in the signal description and an external trigger is used to pro vide a reference for the start phase If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible positions During short code scrambling the channel data is split up into and Q components Long code scrambling Mobile stations also use a PN short code but with a fixed or no offset Additionally a complex long code is used for scrambling making the data less susceptible to inter ference The long code used by a mobil
128. ation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 2 Welcome to the CDMA2000 Applications The CDMA2000 options are firmware applications that add functionality to the R amp S FPS to perform measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the CDMA2000 standard R amp S FPS K82 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements on forward link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 R amp S FPS K83 performs Mobile Station MS measurements on reverse link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 The measurements are based on the Physical Layer Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Systems Release C of version C S0002 C V1 0 dated May 2002 and Rec ommended Minimum Performance Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Base Stations of version C S0010 B dated December 2002 This standard has been adop ted by the following authorities with the specified norm TIA TIA EIA 97 E dated February 2003 also known as IS 97 E Reference made to the CDMA2000 specification in the
129. be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement All evaluation methods available for the selected CDMA2000 measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following Ed Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display Config button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key The selected evaluation not only affects the result display but also the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 191 The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following evaluation methods for measure ments in the code domain Er EE 18 Chamnel NEE 18 GE 19 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power 20 Composite Cotistellatioln eire ntm EES EENEG EES 21 Composite EVM e 22 Mag Error Som m 23 Peak Code Domain EO EE 24 Phase Emor VS 0 T 25 POW VS PCat E 26 Power vs SVMDG e 27 Result SUMDAN EE 27 Symbol Constellation cirea eterne tene tae EN ENEAS boy nuo Rena PER 27 SYME EVM C m 28 Symbol Magnitude EMO esscr rrii en ive va tee eran tree er aa Pe Ra ed 29 Symbol Phase Bion oi re eR taeda Sei e
130. by the CDMA2000 MS application Test Setup for CDMA2000 Tests Channel Ch no Mapping Description type SF ACKCH 16 64 Q Reverse Acknowledgment Channel 1xEV DV CCCH 2 8 Q Reverse Common Control Channel CQICH 12 16 if FCH Reverse Channel Quality Indicator Channel 1xEV DV availa ble Q DCCH 8 16 Reverse Dedicated Control Channel EACH 2 8 Q Enhanced Access Channel FCH 4 16 Q Reverse Fundamental Channel PICH 0 32 l Reverse Pilot Channel S1CH 1 20r JQ Reverse Supplemental 1 Channel 2 4 S2CH 2 4 or Reverse Supplemental 2 Channel 6 8 Note Since the EACH has the same mapping the same channel number and the same spreading factor as the CCCH it is not possible to distinguish them during an automatic search In this case both the EACH and CCCH are output 4 9 Test Setup for CDMA2000 Tests Before a CDMA measurement can be performed the R amp S FPS must be set up ina test environment This section describes the required settings of the R amp S FPS if it is used as a CDMA2000 base or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FPS has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Preparing For Use Furthermore the applica tion firmware CDMA2000 BTS or CDMA2000 MS must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are described in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual or
131. cale for code based result displays If you set the base spreading factor too low e g to 64 for channels with a base spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power is displayed in the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power diagrams For more information see chapter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 Remote command SENSe CDPower SFACtor on page 171 Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 169 Timing and phase offset calculation Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels to the pilot channel If deactivated or if more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashes are displayed instead of values as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 171 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference in BTS application relative to total power is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 170 Pilot Power Display MS application only For Code Domain Power evaluation in the MS application only Defines whether
132. ceeseecceectenecccecdensdeceeesrbenecacnpenenceeetenesceeeespensees 205 11 9 1 Retrieving Calculated CDA Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUuIt c ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 CAL Cube lt n MARKGISMI Y E 190 Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult Measurement This command queries individual values of the measured and calculated results of the CDMA2000 code domain power measurement Query parameters Measurement Retrieving Results ACTive Number of active channels CDPabsolute Channel power absolute in dBm CDPRelative Channel power relative in dB relative to total or PICH power refer to CDP PREF command CERRor Chip rate error in ppm CHANnel Channel number DMType Domain type EVMRms Error vector magnitude RMS in 96 EVMPeak Error vector mag peak in 96 FERPpm Frequency error in ppm FERRor Frequency error in Hz IQIMbalance IQ imbalance in IQOFfset IQ offset in MACCuracy Composite EVM in 96 PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB POFFset Phase offset in rad PPICh Pilot power in dBm PTOTal Total power in dBm RHO RHO SFACtor Spreading factor of channel SLOT PCG number SRATe Symbol rate in ksps TFRame 11 9 2 Retrieving Results Trigger to frame TOFFset Timing offse
133. ch the other branch may belong to an inactive channel 4 6 Radio Configuration The radio configuration specifies various settings for transmission according to the CDMA2000 standard including allowed data rates modulation types e use of special channels e transmit diversity The standard describes nine RCs for BTS and six for MS signals for different trans mission scenarios In the BTS application the radio configuration can be customized for two channel types PDCH and CHAN see chapter 4 8 1 BTS Channel Types on page 45 The applied RC is specified for each channel of these types in the channel tables Prede fined channel tables are provided for particular radio configurations see chapter A 1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables on page 227 The following RCs are used in the BTS application Table 4 3 RCs used in the BTS application Channel type Modulation Manual operation SCPI parameter PDCH QPSK 10 10 8PSK 10 20 16QAM 10 30 CHAN 1 2 1 special channels 0 4 7 Transmission with Multiple Carriers and Multiple Antennas The CDMA2000 standard allows for transmission using multiple carriers as well as transmission via multiple antennas 4 7 1 Multicarrier Mode The CDMA2000 applications can filter out and analyze one carrier out of a multicarrier signal if a special multicarrier mode is activated in the signal description Transmission with Multiple Carriers and Mu
134. chapter A 1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables on page 227 o Quasi inactive channels in the MS application In the MS application only one branch in the code domain is analyzed at a time see also chapter 4 5 Code Mapping and Branches on page 42 However even if the code on the analyzed branch is inactive the code with the same number on the other branch may belong to an active channel In this case the channel is indicated as quasi inactive in the current branch evaluation 4 8 1 BTS Channel Types The CDMA2000 standard defines various BTS channel types Some special channels are mandatory and must be contained in the signal as they have control or synchroni zation functions Thus these channels always occupy a specific channel number and use a specific symbol rate by which they can be identified Special channels The CDMA2000 BTS application expects at least the Pilot Channel F PICH or the Transmit Diversity Pilot CHannel F TDPICH for the Code Domain Power measure ments The following channels are detected automatically during automatic channel detection Table 4 4 Common CDMA2000 BTS channels and their usage Channel Ch no Modulation Description type ISF F PICH 0 64 BPSK Pilot channel F PCH 1 64 BPSK Paging channel EEN User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 45 Channel Detection and Channel Types Channel Ch no Modulation Description type ISF F TDPICH 16 128 BPSK
135. command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FPS follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 125 Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emp
136. configured according to the requirements of the CDMA2000 standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FPS User Manual RF Measurement Types and Results The CDMA2000 applications provide the following RF measurements gl mM 30 Channel Power AC UR ics iiu tg eerie seta redet uer cri ec asc EQUES ITE Te eR da RE DU 31 Spectrum Emission Mask rtr ttai eL AEE NEESS 32 OGCUPIS e e EE E 33 CO DF D niin iia ina iene 34 Power The Power measurement determines the CDMA2000 signal channel power To do so the CDMA2000 application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with settings according to the CDMA2000 standard The bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Summary R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays WEE MultiView 3 CDMA2000 BTS Ref Level 0 00 dem s RBW 10kHz Att 10d8 SWT 100ms e VBW 300kHz Mode Auto Sweep I CF 13 25 GHz 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz 2 Channel Power 89 antt Channel Bandwidth Orset Power 1 Ref 1 MH 129 38 dBm 129 38 dBm Remote command CONF CDP MEAS POW see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 206 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESu1t on page
137. d Mapping Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The setting is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel For more information see chapter 4 5 Code Mapping and Branches on page 42 Remote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 168 Power Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after you press the Meas button see Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 84 Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command BTS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 MS application CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 163 Domain Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan nels Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured sweep Average Cou E 88 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT sssssessssssseseee eene entrent trns snnt eintreten nennt 89 sindle Swesp RUN SINGU Bisco retire etica ee etta t de oe este dao 89 Continue Single SWEEP anirnar nA a A A SENE A EEE 89 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode
138. d fclose fid Abbreviations A 5 Abbreviations For a comprehensive glossary refer to the cdma2000 standard APICH auxiliary pilot channel ATDPCH auxiliary transmit diversity pilot channel BCH broadcast channel CACH common assignment channel CCCH common control channel 2 8 CDEP code domain error power CDP code domain power Composite EVM CPCCH in accordance with the cdma2000 specifications determines the square root of the squared error between the real and the imaginary parts of the test signal and an ideally generated reference signal EVM referred to the total signal in a composite EVM mea surement common power control channel Crest factor ratio of peak to average value of the signal EACH Enhanced access channel 2 8 FCH Fundamental channel 4 16 Inactive Channel Threshold minimum power that a single channel must have compared with the total signal to be recognized as an active channel MC1 multi carrier1 one carrier system 1X MC2 multi carrier3 three carrier system 3X OTD orthogonal transmit diversity two antennas used PCG power control group name in cdma2000 system for 1536 chips or 1 25 ms interval transmitter power is constant during a power control group PCH paging channel PDCH packet data channel PDCCH packet data control channel PICH pilot channel 0 64
139. de Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The frequency error is available in the units Hz or ppm referred to the carrier fre quency Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchronization errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the R amp S FPS could not synchronize to the CDMA2000 signal Trigger to Frame Reflects the time offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first PCG In case of triggered data recording this corresponds to the timing offset timing offset frame trigger trigger offset start of first PCG If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FPS to the CDMA2000 signal this measurement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed Active Channels Specifies the number of active channels found in the signal Detected data chan nels as well as special channels are regarded as active With transmit diversity the result applies to the selected Antenna Diversity Antenna Number PCG Results PCG results concern the total signal that is all channels for the selected PCG 0 Code Domain Analysis Table 3 2 Code domain power results for the current PCG Parameter Description Total Power Shows the
140. ded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated SSS ee aa User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 34 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE 3 2 2 Ref Level 0 50 dBm AnBW 40 MHz Att 9d8 Meas Time 12 5 ms 1 CCDF CF 100 0 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 Mean Peak Crest Ae 1 Trace 1 7 22 dBm 3 34 dBm 10 56 dB 6 90 d 0 1 D B Fig 3 18 CCDF measurement results for the BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CCDF see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 208 Evaluation Methods for RF Measurements The evaluation methods for RF measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application Daga eessen A O ced udd aa tte 35 siccus E 36 Marker Table N NR 36 ulnis dia 4l 36 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on
141. ding on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 38 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected PCG A trace over all symbols of a PCG is drawn 1 Symbol EVM Fig 3 14 Symbol EVM display for the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 6 min to 384 max depending on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 38 Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these chan nels do not contain data Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 28 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol
142. dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable RF Measurements length is recorded continuously in zero span and the distribution of the signal ampli tudes is evaluated The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power The Result Summary dis plays the number of included samples the mean and peak power and the crest factor The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the follow ing settings Table 6 6 Predefined settings for CDMA2000 CCDF measurements CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 VBW 5 MHz For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FPS User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset Analysis bandwidth e Number of samples Code Domain Analysis Settings 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 10 General Analysis on page 208 Analyzing RF Measurements General result analysis settings c
143. e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks 11 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In MSRA mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon E from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 From the main Code Domain Analyzer menu select the Channel Detection soft key to open the Channel Detection dialog box 2 To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Select the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list 3 In the Channel Table dialog box define a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list 4 Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the currently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to i
144. e R amp S FPS on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 89 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use conti
145. e electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 71 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 73 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11 5 4 1 The oPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the Sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering GondltiOrs ctc tote port tir ntt te needs 150 e Configuring the Tigger Output orien E ert Er entire e i Ee 154 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger SEQuehce DTIMe 2 2 1 rore eo eren terio tuu ea nanc eet aea derer 150 TRIGE SEQuencec HOLDotf TIME oae rou erp nete eunt en pn cet aot enero en ex uns 150 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDOoff eese enne nennen nennen nnns 150 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis c roit eet teet aree nanaii 151 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port cessisse 151 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IFPower cesses n
146. e level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 147 Code Domain Analysis Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FPS You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 91 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 167 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FPS Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation is not available mechanical attenua tion is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The ra
147. e name of a window Configuring the Result Display Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter
148. e of a channel can be fully recognized based on pilot sequences or modula tion type the type is indicated in the table In the BTS application all other channels are of type CHAN The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the inactive codes are always displayed at the end of the table if Show inactive channels is enabled see Table Configuration on page 19 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 18 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Channel Table Gr Channel Walsh SymRate Power T Offs P Offs Type az ksps dBm ns mrad Fig 3 2 Channel Table display for the BTS application Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Table Configuration Channel Table You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table by double clicking the table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you select the columns to be displayed Columns to be displayed Chan Type PowerDBm Ch SF PowerDB SymRate TOffs RC POffs Status Lad Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels includ ing the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option The following parameters of the detected channels are determined by the CDP mea surement and can be displayed i
149. e of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 102 11 10 2 11 10 2 1 General Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The me
150. e offset 0 63 MS lt code class gt code class of the channel with maxi 2 7 BTS mum time offset 1 6 MS lt phase offset gt maximum phase offset rad code number of the channel with maxi mum phase offset lt code number gt 0 127 BTS 0 63 MS lt code class gt code class of the channel with maxi 2 7 BTS mum phase offset 1 6 MS lt reserved 1 6 gt reserved for future use 0 Measurement example for TRAC DATA CTAB NIT CONT OFF Select single sweep NIT CONT OFF Select single sweep LAY REPL WIND 1 CTAB Replace CDP by Channel Table evaluation in window 1 NIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC CTAB Read out maximum timing and phase offsets Result 1 20E 009 2 2 3 01E 003 15 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 where 1 20E 009 2 2 Max time offset with code number and code class of associated channel 3 01E 003 15 4 Max phase offset with code number and code class of associated channel 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 reserved values 11 9 3 3 Retrieving Results Code Domain Error Power The command returns four values for each channel code class code numbers error power power ID The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels but not for the number of values With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular chann
151. e station is defined by a mask and an offset These settings are required by the CDMA2000 MS application to distinguish the send ers and are defined in the signal description The long code offset also includes the PN offset if any and is defined in chips The offset corresponds to the GPS timing since 6 1 1980 00 00 00 UTC The offset in chips is calculated as follows tSinceStartGPS 1 2288 MChips s where tSinceStartGPS is defined in seconds The offset is applied at the next trigger pulse which cannot occur until a setup time of 300 ms has elapsed A special long code generation mode is provided to analyze signals sent by an Agi lent ESG 101 generator During long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the or to the Q branch of the complex input signal Code Mapping and Branches Since MS signals use long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the I or to the Q branch of the complex input signal During channel detection the branch to which the data was mapped is determined and indicated in the channel table During analysis each branch of the symbol constellation area imaginary part or real part Q can be evaluated independantly Thus when analyzing MS signals you must define which branch results you want to analyze Especially for code power measurements User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 42 Radio Configuration the results may vary considerably While a channel may be active on one bran
152. e these settings only if an external trigger is connected to the TRIGGER INPUT connector of the analyzer Otherwise ignore these commands Define the use of an external trigger TRIGger SOURce EXT ees Signal Description IF KNOWN define the pseudo noise offset of the base station from the external trigger of 2 64 chips to accelerate calculation SENS CDP PNOF 2 Capture data only from signal at antenna 1 SENS CDP ANT 1 Switch to multi carrier signal detection and disable enhanced signal detection algorithm to accelerate calculation CONF CDP BTS MCAR ON CONF CDP BTS MCAR MALG OFF Activate multicarrier RRC filter with rolloff 0 02 and cutoff at 1 25 MHz CONF CDP BTS MCAR FILT ON CONF CDP BTS MCAR FILT TYPE RRC CONF CDP BTS MCAR FILT ROFF 0 02 CONF CDP BTS MCAR FILT COFR 1 25MHZ pisses ssss 5 Channel detection Configure an inactive threshold of 60 0 dB SENS CDP ICTR 60 Configuring the result display Activate the following result displays 1 Code Domain Power default upper left 2 Result Summary default below CDP 3 Code Domain Error Power next to CDP 4 Bitstream Table next to Result Summary LAYout ADD WINDow 1 RIGH PCD LAYout ADD WINDow 2 RIGH BITS Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measurements ffe Code domain settings Use a base spreadi
153. eb browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt Q Data File Format iq tar ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS_IQ_TAR_File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute fi leFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used ScalingFactor Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals
154. ectors ODTPut RIGdersponto DIRestlohi uccide nerit ntn Eee er na eoe Dn 154 OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel 2 1 iori Focuses eei i ee rp vate egy VY e Pec ERR V2 Rd 154 OUTPuETRIGOersport OTY PE eege 155 OUTPut TRiGaersport PULSe1MMgdiate 5 4 to aco uo Pha tls du ten rint roto tn an et rna 155 OUTPuETRIGgersport s PUL SS ENGIE 22 22 2 rior de kan truc ca vua eu sva vega ue rk ege 155 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 67 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGgEr lt port gt t0OTYPe Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 67 See Level on page 67 11 5 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the
155. ed in 1 The signal of antenna 1 is fed in 2 The signal of antenna 2 is fed in RST OFF For further details refer to Antenna Diversity Antenna Number on page 60 11 5 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CDP ANT 2 Selects antenna 2 Manual operation See Antenna Diversity Antenna Number on page 60 SENSe CDPower PNOFfset Offset This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters Offset Range 0 to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Manual operation See PN Offset on page 60 MS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in MS measurements For more information see Long code scrambling on page 42 Useful commands for describing MS signals described elsewhere CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 135 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 135 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 137 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 137 Remote commands exclusive to describing MS signals SENSeJOCDPowerECODeMASK iet cet rtr honte a bee d eee ti ones tru Re cR E Ie MERO 138 SENSeTCDPowWerECODe MOLDE eter deze ee attento dr ete ela te dedo 139 SENSe CDPowetr L CODGe OFFSelt
156. el are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for Code Domain Error Power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore gener ally corresponds to the base spreading factor Value Description Range Unit code class code class of the channel see chapter 4 2 Channels Codes 2 7 BTS and Symbols on page 38 1 6 MS code number code number within the channel 0 127 BTS 0 63 MS lt signal level gt error power 0 dB lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 power of own antenna 2 alias power of own antenna 3 alias power of other antenna 4 alias power of own and other antenna o To avoid alias power set the base spreading factor correctly 11 9 3 4 For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 191 Code Domain Power The command returns four values for each channel code class code numbers signal level power ID The number of displayed values depends on the spreading factor In Hadamard order the different codes are output in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading fac tor In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel Retrieving
157. encer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Retrieving Results A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results from a cdma2000 measurement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query abbreviations or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in chapter 11 5 6 Channel Detection on page 157 Specific commands e Retrieving Calculated CDA Res lts centenis 187 e Retrieving CDA Trace ResSulls eren bee certe tet de un da 190 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE xn sese 192 Exporting Trace TEE 204 e Retrieving RF ROSUINS ccccceceiece
158. ending on spreading factor see table 4 2 0 spreading factor 1 Channel number without SF 0 branch 1 Q branch Always 0 reserved for future use 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Power value in dB INST SEL M2K Activate cdma2000 MS mode CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 2 2 2 1 05535 0 1 0 MS mode only See Channel Type on page 85 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 85 See Power on page 86 See Status on page 86 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME Name This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it Parameters Name string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the channel table RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Manual operation See Creating a New Table on page 83 See Name on page 84 11 5 7 Sweep Settings SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUN 0 02 2 cee eeeeeceeeceeee eee eeeeeee tesa eae ae eee renean teh nh nen nn n nene n nenen eneee 164 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce tet te enttentnttenetetnt tette tette t test r tans 164 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces for all windows
159. ennen hne nnns 152 TRiGger SEOuence EEVel OPGWD cc cues eua cepere aa eere enun 152 TRIGger SEQuence E EVelRFBOWETF tator a ana Dod ien en Lose cde YR RH eua 152 TRIGger RE EE 152 RER e 153 RRE Re DEE 153 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Configuring Code Domain Analysis Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FPS ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff
160. ent is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a PCG To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FPS 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FPS to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FPS TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD cdma2000 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo a F o wm DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt cdma2000 BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 The f
161. er 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 178 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to
162. er For MSRA applications only the query command is available 11 5 3 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 69 Amplitude and Scaling Settings Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 140 INPut IMPedance on page 141 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 167 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings GAL Gulatesm UNIT POWBE EE 145 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects lt SCALelAUlTOONCE 145 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelMANimum 146 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eseeeeeeen eene 146 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon nennen 146 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel essen 147 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz vlt SCALelbRlEVelOEtzGet nenene neren nereereeene 147 IN Put GAS KN 147 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all t
163. er emissions within the specified range the signal power is measured with a 30kHz filter The resulting trace is compared with a limit line as defined in the CDMA2000 standard The limit lines are automatically selected as a function of the used band class Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FPS coaxial cable with N connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET 2 FREQ 878 49 MHz 3 LEVEL 0 dBm 4 DIGITAL STD cdma2000 5 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 6 DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD 7T DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt cdma2000 BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt Spectrum Emission Mask The spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the stand ard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyzes the signal over a single Power Control Group PCG It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channe
164. er the whole observation period all PCGs Results which take the overall signal into account over a power control group PCG Results which take one channel into account over the whole observation period all PCGs Results which take one channel into account over a power control group PCG Code Domain Analysis Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CDP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 e Gode Doman Paramete S tty ener Sg 15 e Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Anahysls A 17 3 1 4 Code Domain Parameters In the Result Summary three different types of measurement results are determined and displayed General results for the current set e PCG results for the current set and PCG Channel results for the selected channel In the Channel Table channel results for a channels are displayed General Results Under General Results the measurement results that concern the total signal that is all channels for the entire period of observation that is all PCGs are displayed Table 3 1 General code domain power results for the current set Parameter Description Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FPS The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FPS and that of the device under test Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Co
165. erform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform CDMA2000 measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FPS User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex Reference material List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 7 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FPS consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of t
166. es a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 Commands for Compatibility lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 14 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote commands programs use the specified alternative commands CAL Culate lt mtPEED e 223 SENSeJODPowWerEEVeLlADUJUsL EE 224 SENSe CDPoWenPRESGE E 224 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new rem
167. eving Calculated results remote sssssss 187 Results remote 1 ced eee 187 RF Results remote AAA 205 Trace results remote sss 190 RF attenuation AUTO P Manual RF input Remote RF measurements FOIE 98 Analysis remote EE 173 COMAZOOO DEE A A E TETT 30 Configuring x99 Configuring remote 172 Petformlitig nacti iai enoa esr es 113 CH pe 30 Results remote 205 E rtr tr erre rie n tes 93 WY POS C aeaee 30 RF Power Trigger level remote eese 152 RF signal power BS Ed ebe EE 16 Measurement examples siirinsesi 122 Results remote eee 188 Roll off factor RRG EE 61 64 135 RRC filter MUN CARO seet EE rerit catia reet 136 RRC Filter Cut off frequeri y eatis 62 64 135 Multicarrier Roll off factor 1 4 61 64 135 RUN CONT l 89 RUN SINGLE p 89 S ye 47 ll 79 Configuring in channel table 85 88 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 73 Configuration softkey oe K E zu ferie EE 42 Select MEAS E 54 SEM Bandclasses iecit sara dis 95 96 172 232 cdma2000 res lls 2 x restet cina e
168. exadecimal format with a 52 bit resolu tion The chips offset is calculated as follows tSinceS tartGPS 1 2288 MChips s where tSinceStartGPS is defined in seconds This value corresponds to the GPS timing since 6 1 1980 00 00 00 UTC RST HO Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example The hexadecimal offset of 258000 h chips is set for the first even second clock trigger INST SEL MC2K Activate cdma2000 MS by default CDP relative is displayed in screen A and Result Summary in screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source CDP LCOD MASK H2 Define long code mask CDP LCOD OFFS H258000 Define long code offset INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization Manual operation See Long Code Offset on page 63 11 5 2 Configuring the Data Input and Output The following commands are required to configure data input and output For more information see chapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 64 LEE Des 140 eene ne Me Ouse P 142 11 5 2 1 RF Input Ei ere TTT e U 140 INPUCDPA T EE 141 Nur TerviGtST AaTel ene nnns an aariin anarai enn renes 141 leet EE EE 141 INBPUE SEU EE 142 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confir
169. f the channel and PCG BPSK QPSK 8PSK or 16QAM MS application only Indicates the selected branch I or Q Phase Offset Phase offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 99 the maxi mum value of the phase offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the phase offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign Power Absolute Absolute dBm power of the channel Power Relative Relative dB power of the channel refers either to the pilot channel or the total power of the signal Code Domain Analysis Parameter Description Symbol EVM Peak or mean value of the EVM measurement result For further details refer to the result display Symbol EVM on page 28 Timing Offset Timing offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 99 the maxi mum value of the timing offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the timing offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured UO data can
170. floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications UO data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e Import Export FUNC ONS rene rrr crecen ee naiaiae RR deu ere ete ER eren been inne Eun 52 5 1 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool p bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FPS User Manual nge nom MIT 53 el TT teet tete rcm rettet tk ater tbe petes tate kb a si ce ves uL 53 2 100 EE 53 2 i o MMC 53 Import Export Functions Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FP
171. following text alludes to these standards The application firmware R amp S FPS 82 supports radio configurations 1 to 5 and 10 Thus IS95A B signals conforming to radio configurations 1 amp 2 can also be measured with this application firmware Channels and modulation types of the 1xEV DV enhancement are supported as well The application firmware R amp S FPS 83 supports the radio configurations 3 and 4 Apart from CDMA2000 reverse link signals the 1xEV DV reverse link channels of Release C are also supported Code Domain Analysis is also possible at signals where the pilot channel is active in at least one of the captured power control groups pilot gating In addition to the code domain measurements described in the CDMA2000 standard the CDMA2000 applications feature measurements in the spectral range such as chan nel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the applications pro vide including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FPS User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes
172. from an external trigger If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible positions For details see chapter 4 4 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes on page 42 Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 138 Antenna Diversity Antenna Number Activates or deactivates the orthogonal transmit diversity two antenna system and defines the antenna for which the results are displayed For details on antenna diversity see also chapter 4 7 2 Antenna Diversity on page 44 Antenna 1 The signal of antenna 1 is fed in Antenna 2 The signal of antenna 2 is fed in Code Domain Analysis Off The aggregate signal from both antennas is fed in The pilot channels of both antennas are required As reference for the code power Power Reference PICH is used Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 137 Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode This mode improves the processing of multicarrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multicarrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 137 Enhanced Algorithm Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multicarrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page
173. g for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt SortOrder gt HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to chapter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 Example CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets BitReverse order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Manual operation See Code Display Order on page 100 SENSe CDPower PDISplay Mode This command defines how the pilot channel power is displayed in the Result Sum mary In relative mode the reference power is the total power Parameters Mode ABS REL RST REL Example CDP PDIS REL Pilot channel power is displayed in relation to the total power Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 99 SENSe CDPower PPReference Mode This command is only available for Code Domain Power evaluation in MS mode This command defines how the pilot channel power is displayed in the absolute sum mary In relative mode the reference power is the total power Parameters Mode ABS REL RST ABS Example CDP PPR REL Pilot channel power is displayed in relation to the total power Manual operation See Pilot Power Display MS application only on page 99 SENSe CDPower PREFerence Power This command specifies the reference power for
174. ged the R amp S FPS determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 71 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 149 11 5 4 Configuring Code Domain Analysis If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 71 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 71 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns th
175. ger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the UO data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo Level This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters Level Range O PCT to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises t
176. gs Symbol rate 19 2 ksps PN offset 0 chips Antenna Diversity Off MS specific settings Symbol rate 38 4 ksps Long code mask 0 Long code offset 0 Evaluated Branch l Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus T Channel Detection Analysis Display Config Predef Tables Code No Code Domain Power Table Name PCG Code Pow Disp Power Ref Markerl Tracel Select Measurement ees 1 Code Domain Power H Code Domain Analysis In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 RF Measurements on page 93 For Code Domain Analysis the Overview provides quick access to the following con figuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Selecting the measurement type on page 54 2 Signal Description See c
177. hapter 6 2 3 Signal Description on page 59 3 Input Frontend See chapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 64 and chap ter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 68 4 Optionally Trigger See chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 73 5 Signal Capture See chapter 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 78 Note The Synchronization button indicated in the Overview is not required for CDMA2000 measurements 6 Channel Detection See chapter 6 2 9 Channel Detection on page 80 7T Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 98 8 Display Configuration See chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 17 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FPS except for the default Spectrum application channel 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 Code Domain Analysis See chapter 6 2 1 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis on page 56 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXE
178. hasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPla
179. he R amp S FPS Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FPS html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FPS in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default setting
180. he Sequencer see the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 183 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 184 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 183 Code Domain Analysis 6 2 11 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FPS automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic sett
181. he different codes of this channel are located H DA MA RO Bona 001001 001010 001011 001101 001110 001111 01000 010001 010010 010011 01100 25 011001 011010 011011 01110 011101 011110 011111 101001 42 101010 101011 101100 101101 101110 101111 110100 110101 110110 110111 111100 111101 111410 11111 jo o o ojo o o of j joo o ojo oo of jo o o ojo o o of j jo ooojooo o BITREVERSE m0m 1000 01000 11000 01100 411000 DO 10 100100 01010 11010 00110 101100 01110 111100 00010 10010 010010 110010 001010 101010 011010 111010 00110 10110 010110 110110 001110 101110 011110 111110 omo001 100001 010001 110001 001001 101001 011001 111001 00101 10101 010101 410101 001101 101101 011101 111101 00011 10011 010011 110011 001011 101011 011011 111011 00111 10111 010111 110111 001111 101111 011111 111111 Fig 1 1 Codetable for base spreading factor 64 Reference Code Tables Im nel nao 3 10 11 12 13 UU 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3 3 35 36 37 38 38 D 42 i3 ae as 46 il 45 43 so 51 2 53 se SS 56 Sr ss sg 60 61 62 63 HO Kool mm0 IEDUD1 1 m0100 00101 000110 00111 mm1 umi LED 1014 01100 01101 001110 001111 mi0 mim m1010 mimi i 010100 010101 010110 10111 011000 m
182. i teretes 92 Multiple mode remote 181 182 REMOTE aca ecce bod Shaved ovens ecc e eese im EUR 180 Restoring original display sees 92 Single mode Single mode remote AAA 180
183. ilable for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 155 6 2 7 Code Domain Analysis Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 154 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 155 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 155 Signal Capture Data Acquisition You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal A Signal Captur Common Settings Sample Rate Invert Q Capture Settings Number of PCGs Number of Sets 1 each Set has 64 PCGs Set to Analyze MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the CDMA2000
184. in Emon e TEE 197 Codedonmal P WE uctor e vasi E re TE EE e here E ere v dienes 197 Composite GConstellation teet REENEN NEESS EEN a aaa 201 Composite E VM EMS iee s ERENNERT 202 EVM YS O RI EE 202 11 9 3 1 11 9 3 2 Retrieving Results Frequency Ear vs POS ode tnter dane eas tae vedete ema uae Te xen 202 e PoWervslPGQQ EEN 202 e Peak Code Domain Error eese eene tnis 202 Phase Discontinuity vs PGG ue eie ne cedente cnn x die ce eus 202 e JPowervs Symbol eer SE 203 e Reuk SUMMI eet 203 e Symbol ConstellatiOri certet npn e ERR ane iaia gm unen RR RR NEA REFUS 204 Ee EE 204 Bitstream When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the bit stream of one PCG i e one value per bit for each symbol is transferred Each symbol contains two consecutive bits in the case of a QPSK modulated PCG and 4 consecutive bits in the case of a 16QAM modulated PCG One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary for each sweep Individual symbols in the bit stream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power The assigned invalid bits are marked by one of the digits 6 7 or 9 Channel Table Two different commands are available to retrieve the channel table results e TRAC DATA TRACEx commands return detailed trace information for each chan nel TRAC DATA CTAB1le provides the
185. ing Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display button in the Overview Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any CDMA2000 menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The CDMA2000 evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Meth ods for Code Domain Analysis on page 17 Code Domain Analysis To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual 6 2 Code Domain Analysis CDMA2000 measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS which you activate using the MODE key When you activate a CDMA2000 application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a CDMA2000 application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Code Domain Analyzer menu is displayed and provides access to the most important config
186. ing Code Domain Analysis In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 69 Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Mast
187. ing the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 119 e Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eseeenneeeenen etes 120 e Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 122 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the CDMA2000 signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FPS coaxial cable with N connectors 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 7 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD cdma2000 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo a Bo N DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt cdma2000 BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt POWER The spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The CDMA2000 specification calls for a measurement that monitors compliance with a spectral mask over a range of at least 4 0 MHz around the CDMA2000 carrier To assess the pow
188. ings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However CDMA2000 applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 90 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 90 Auto Scale WINGOW T 91 ELI NU 91 Restore Scale re Le EE EN Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 91 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 91 Upper Level Hysteresis errno rreran EERSTEN AETERNE E 91 Lower Level Hysieresis to teta tede Re eni ba e tore EES 91 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes Auto Level Auto Scale All on page 91 This function is only available for the MSRA Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 165 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FPS You can
189. input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FPS User Manual EEr ECE N O User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 74 Code Domain Analysis L Capture Osbourne di dut RO d 77 M rerelgr UP 77 Die ML sik E E ee 77 dto EE 78 L Pulse PE UE OO 78 Ehr 78 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 153 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 153 External Trigger 1 2 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 76 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRG IN connector For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRG IN connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRG AUX connector Note Connector m
190. internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 91 SENSe ADJust CONF igure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 91 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FPS or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual ope
191. ion due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 167 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 167 6 2 12 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar Code Domain Analysis insu aol EE M c 92 IMU HONG ZOOM EP 92 Restore Original Display ictor eredi rne retenta tenete essere 92 k Deactivating Zoom Selection mode ati b add t das 92 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn 200M STATe on page 181 DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M AREA on page 180 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge seve
192. kers Marker Settings Search Range Next Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Gelder 1 Code Domain Power Search Mode for Next Peak 107 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 10 2 3 Positioning the Marker on page 213 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Markers Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Search Next Peak s cna dence theta e sep eb e dn ret c vet t dE ve de 108 Search Next Oe E EE 108 Peak Seateh EE 108 Vests rer KU T ENTE PRETERITO 108 Markor To PIGH ii eee eei re nc res e b c P rt Ce e a v eda 108 Marker To TDPIC A BEE 109 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated
193. l Analysis Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings DISPlay Ng e 213 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 106 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal klaue guden get eg deeg cnet en ee eR ds 213 e Positioning Delta Markers iced i ror aaa ka eae voc Pe diene 215 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonPIcCH 214 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon TDlch 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEFT ccccssscccescccecesceeesesceceeceseeseeceseeeeeeneeeaes 214 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT 214 CALCu latesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXim m PDEAK aiiai addaa 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimMUM RIGHL c cccccceececessseeceeceeeceace
194. lot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 99 the maximum value of the timing offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the timing offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is dis played with the original sign Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power The Code Domain Power evaluation shows the power of all possible code channels in the total signal over the selected PCG Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and the ideal signal The x axis represents the channel code number which corresponds to the base spreading factor The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel With the error power both active and inactive channels can be evalu ated at a glance Both evaluations support either Hadamard or BitReverse code sorting order see chap ter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 MS application only the error power is calculated only for the selected branch 1 or Q I Code Domain Power Fig 3 3 Code Domain Power Display for the BTS application User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 20 R amp S9FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Code Domain Error Power Fig 3 4 Code Domain Error Power result display for the MS application Active and inactive data channels
195. ls Check the center frequency Perform an automatic reference level adjustment In BTS measurements when using an external trigger check whether an external trigger signal is being sent to the R amp S FPS and check the PN offset In MS measurements check the Long Code Mask and Long Code Offset Make sure Invert Q is off Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the application specific error messages for CDMA2000 mea surements is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level or signal description values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible 9 How to Perform Measurements in CDMA2000 Applications The following step by step instructions describe how to perform measurements with the CDMA2000 applications To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 Select the MODE key and the cdma2000 BTS application for base station tests or cdma2000 MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 3 Select the Signal Descriptio
196. ls In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FPS 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FPS to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD cdma2000 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo oO ho N DIGITAL STD gt cdma2000 gt STATE ON Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error Settings on the R amp S FPS 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt cdma2000 BTS 3 AMPT Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz The following results are displayed the first window shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In the second window the Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference freque
197. ltiple Antennas Two filter types used to select the required carrier from the signal are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On IH b in dB D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 O89 1 Frequency in MHz Fig 4 4 Frequency response of the low pass multicarrier filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window The roll off factor of the RRC filter defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter The cut off frequency of the RRC filter is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Both parameters can be configured 4 7 2 Antenna Diversity The standard allows for transmission via multiple antennas transmit diversity If transmit diversity is implemented for the input signal the CDMA2000 BTS application must know which antenna to analyze the input from This information is provided by the signal description Antenna Diversity Depending on which antenna is selected for analysis certain special channels are required for predefined channel tables see also Channel table definition for transmit diversity on page 46 Antenna Required special channels 1 Pilot channel F PICH 0 64
198. lues for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Sample result description see table below 52853 2634403840 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 3GB 2 XML 1428 3GB 3 16 XML 3430 3GB 3 32 XML 5868 3GB 4 XML 678 3GB 5 2 XML 2554 3GB 5 4 XML 4101 3GB 5 8 XML 7202 3GB 6 XML 7209 MYTABLE XML 349 Usage Query only Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 82 Table 11 5 Description of query results in example Value Description 52853 Total size of all channel table files 52583 bytes 2634403840 Free memory on hard disk 2 6 Gbytes 3GB 1 16 XML Channel table 1 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 File size for channel table 1 3469 bytes 3GB 1 32 XML Channel table 2 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 File size for channel table 2 5853 bytes 3GB 1 64 XML Channel table 3 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 File size for channel table 3 10712 bytes Channel table x Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table into another one The cha
199. m bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 141 6 2 4 2 Output Settings The R amp S FPS can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters D How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Trigger 2 erer E E E X 66 TO e 67 KEREN 67 B NR E M ere Tay Sree nearer 67 L Pues Londini tetto ndo dea eai dcr ara 67 NESSUN APTE EDU TEE 68 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the R amp S FPS on or off if available Code Domain Analysis External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FPS itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 142 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector
200. magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference between the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol rela ted to the magnitude of the reference symbol 1 Symbol Magnitude Error Symb 0 2 Symb Symb 19 Fig 3 15 Symbol Magnitude Error display for CDMA2000 BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SMERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive val ues of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one 1 Symbol Phase Error Symb 0 2S8ymb Symb 19 Fig 3 16 Symbol Phase Error display for CDMA2000 BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SPERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 SS ae User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 29 RF Measurements 3 2 RF Measurements 3 2 1 In addition to the Code Domain Analysis measurements the CDMA2000 firmware applications also provide some RF measurements as defined in the CDMA2000 stand ard RF measurements are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but
201. mand selects the RF measurement type with predefined settings according to the CDMA2000 standard Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Measurement ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power measurement CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement with predefined settings according to the CDMA2000 standard RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Manual operation See Power on page 30 See Channel Power ACLR on page 31 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 32 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 33 See CCDF on page 34 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 84 11 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis e Sonal DESC le EE 135 e Configuring the Data Input and Output 140 e Erontend CornfigUellpli occid crt cred tn cnet Et tct cett cet Ee vta 142 e Configuring Triggered Measurements ose oerte aaa 149 e Signal Captulilig t re eorr x eed Fa e Heb UN eee 155 Channel DGtC Cui RR 157 LEE ouo 164 Almah BH rre t det esce re PRSETER rad 165 JEValualom We TTT 167 e Code Domain Analysis Settings ocior oret rcn
202. mand to disable a channel tempo rarily Power value in dB CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 BTS application only Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis See Channel Type on page 85 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 85 See Power on page 86 See Status on page 86 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to MS mode only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 162 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 6 2 9 5 MS Channel Details on page 86 Parameters ChannelType lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt Example Mode Manual operation Numeric channel type according to table 11 4 2 to 4 Code class dep
203. maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned channel and the pilot channel Results for TRACEx Parameters The command returns 8 values for each channel in the following order channel type code class code numbers radio configuration gt absolute level relative level timing offset phase offset Value Description Range Unit channel type channel type 0 13 BTS see table 11 2 0 9 MS and table 11 4 code class code class of the channel see chapter 4 2 Channels 2 7 BTS Codes and Symbols on page 38 1 6 MS lt code number gt code number within the channel 0 127 BTS 0 63 MS lt radio config gt radio configuration see chapter 4 6 Radio Configuration BTS only on page 43 mapping MS channel mapping 0 branch only 1 Q branch Retrieving Results Value Description Range Unit absolute level absolute power level of the channel o dBm relative level relative power level of the channel referred to either Total Lach or Pilot power dB timing offset referred to the pilot channel S phase offset referred to the pilot channel 9 for e CDE TPM OFF e 50 active channels found inactive channel rad In BTS measurements the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All detected special channels 2 Data channels in ascending
204. measurement any time ABO geleed EE ees 182 INI Tiate sn CONMBBS tectae one xtd co xxt cat aep tentes ibtd at co e tto e db 183 INITiate sns el nt 183 UNI iene E TEE 184 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORL cccccccccssececeeeececeececesseeseeceeeceaeeeeseseeeseseeecaueeesseseesaneeees 184 INITiate n SEQuencer IMMediate riii entire datae cas nnn tace ndn an nr cna einn da nem suut 185 NiTiate lt sn gt Ee RTE 185 INlTlate nz SEOuencerRtrbResht ALL 186 SV HR 186 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs Starting a Measurement If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FPS is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to th
205. med FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Retrieving RF Results The following commands retrieve the results of the cdma2000 RF measurements Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere cCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 Retrieving Results Remote commands exclusive to retrieving RF results Ee E EE az cient ide bae ea tti e ni ta Lore bv bau eret e rete tt ves aces 206 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESUIt eene 206 GALGCulate n STATisties RESullsE 2 EE 208 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 183 Return values lt
206. med Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 65 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut DPATh State Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters State AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 65 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 65 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 65 11 5 2 2 11 5 3 11 5 3 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut SELect Source This c
207. message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed Correct the PN Offset P Signal Description gt PN Offset 0 Now the PN offset on the R amp S FPS is the same as that of the signal In the Result Summary the Trigger to Frame value is now correct Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FPS In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM in a diagram in which the x axis represents the examined PCGs and the y axis shows the EVM values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FPS 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FPS to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FPS TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal
208. n button and configure the expected input signal 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal In MSRA mode define the application data instead see To select the application data for MSRA measurements on page 113 7 Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 112 8 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 9 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 10 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evalu ated in the individual result displays e Select the set PCG slot or code to be evaluated e Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s e Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of sweeps If necessary increase the Sweep Average Count in the Sweep Config dia log box
209. n Analysis functions for the CDMA2000 standard These examples assume a basic test setup as described in chapter 4 9 Test Setup for CDMA2000 Tests on page 47 The following measurement examples are basic CDMA2000 base station tests using a setup with a signal generator e g an R amp S SMU They are meant to demonstrate how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings The mea surements are performed on a CDMA2000 signal with an R amp S FPS equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS application Measurement examples for mobile station tests The measurements can be performed for mobile station tests in a similar way with the CDMA2000 MS application In this case use the following settings DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE e FREQ 833 49GHz The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories The R amp S FPS with Application Firmware R amp S FPS K82 CDMA2000 Base Station Test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B46 digital stand ard CDMA2000 options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector The following measurements are described e Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 115 e Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 116 e Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 117 e Meas 4 Measur
210. n constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 21 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Composite Constellation Fig 3 5 Composite Constellation display for the BTS application Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCON See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Composite EVM This result display measures the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal Thus the EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each PCG The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected PCG is highlighted red You can set the number of PCGs in the Signal Cap ture settings see Number of PCGs on page 79 1 Composite EVM Fig 3 6 Composite EVM result display User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 22 Code Domain Analysis Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EV
211. n page 53 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 53 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manu
212. n the Channel Table result display For details see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 15 Table 3 4 Code domain power results in the channel table Parameter Description Channel Type Shows the channel type for inactive channels Walsh Ch SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt P Offs mrad Phase offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 99 the maximum value of the phase offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the phase offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is dis played with the original sign Pwr dBm Absolute dBm power of the channel Pwr dB Relative dB power of the channel refers either to the pilot channel or the total power of the signal User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 19 R amp S9FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays Parameter Description RC BTS application only Radio configuration Mapping MS application only Branch the data is mapped to Status Channel status Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels Symbol Rate ksps Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted 9 6 ksps to 307 2 ksps T Offs ns Timing offset between the selected channel and the pi
213. nce of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the CDMA2000 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions The Result Summary contains a peak list with the values for the largest spectral emis sions including their frequency and power The CDMA2000 applications perform the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum appli cation with the following settings Table 6 4 Predefined settings for CDMA2000 SEM measurements Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Span 4 MHz to 1 98 MHz Number of ranges 5 Fast SEM ON Sweep time 100 ms Number of power classes 3 Power reference type Channel power For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FPS User Manual o Changing the RBW and the VBW is restricted due to the definition of the limits by the standard To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset 6 3 4 6 3 5 RF Measurements e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for ACLR and SEM measurements an additional softkey is available to select the required bandclass Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used fo
214. ncluding the PN offset in chips in hexadecimal format with a 52 bit resolution This value corresponds to the GPS timing since 6 1 1980 00 00 00 UTC This offset is applied at the next trigger pulse which cannot occur until a setup time of 300 ms has elapsed The default value is 0 The setting is ignored if the Long Code Mask is set to 0 For more information on long codes see Long code scrambling on page 42 Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe OFFSet on page 139 Long Code Generation Selects the mode of the long code generation Standard The CDMA2000 standard long code generator is used ESG 101 The Agilent ESG option 101 long code is used in this case only sig nals from that generator can be analyzed Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE on page 139 Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode This mode improves the processing of multicarrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multicarrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 137 Enhanced Algorithm Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multicarrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 61 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 137 Multicarrier Filter Multicarrier Activates or deacti
215. nctttecessecttesseseeeteesessne 100 f e Se 102 rac m 103 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 110 8 1 Error Messagas eneeeiee tenenti iore ANN enira dea eE ERE ud ERR au RR RR nR mu sets 110 9 How to Perform Measurements in CDMA2000 Applications 111 10 Measurement Exampl s reato rnnt onnnue innui np cupre aa egen 115 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 115 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eene 116 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 117 10 4 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 119 10 5 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eene nnn 120 10 6 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 122 11 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements 124 11 1 WIntroduction iiee nne naa ie ferra niae tak ux RR RES Pn kn SaaS 124 11 2 COMMON Suffixes eenieeie nii rie EERS rius itas una ANTES nun RR Rn Run nur inus 129 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel eese nnnm 130 11 4 Selecting a Measurement ssseessseeeeee enne nnne nn nennen rnnt nnns 133 11 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis eee
216. ncy gt SETUP gt Reference gt External Reference Again the first window shows the Code Domain Power measurement and the sec ond window contains the Result Summary After the reference frequencies of the devices have been synchronized the frequency error should be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced 1 Onthe signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer display Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FPS is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message 2 Resetthe center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FPS Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 10 4 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurem
217. ned settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 54 Evaluation methods The captured and processed data for each measurement can be evaluated with vari ous different methods All evaluation methods available for the selected CDMA2000 measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The evaluation methods for CDA are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 17 e Code Domain Analyse 14 e IRF Measufreiigiile 4 creer pert cett t t retta beaten d vt d d bt dde 30 3 1 Code Domain Analysis The CDMA2000 firmware applications feature a Code Domain Analyzer It can be used used to perform the measurements required in the CDMA2000 standards with regard to the power of the different codes and code channels concentrated codes In addi tion the modulation quality EVM and RHO factor frequency errors and trigger to frame time as well as the peak code domain errors are determined Constellation eval uations and bitstream evaluations are also available Furthermore the timing and phase offsets of the channels to the pilot can also be calculated The observation period can be set as multiples of the power control group PCG Basically the firmware differentiates between the following result classes for the evalu ations Results which take the overall signal into account ov
218. nel need not lie next to each other in the code domain they may be distributed R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurement Basics p w T em n ees Example Example for Hadamard order For a base spreading factor of 64 the following code order is displayed 0 64 1 64 2 64 63 64 1 Code Domain Error Power Fig 4 2 Code Domain Error Power result display in Hadamard code sorting order In order to compare all codes in the same channel visually a Bit Reverse sorting order is provided In this case all codes of a channel are displayed next to each other Example Example for Bit Reverse order For a base spreading factor of 64 the following code order may be displayed 0 64 32 64 16 64 48 64 8 64 40 64 15 64 47 64 31 64 63 64 2 Code Domain Error Power Fig 4 3 Code Domain Error Power result display in BitReverse code sorting order For the display in the CDMA2000 BTS application the scale for code based diagrams displays 64 codes by default 32 in the MS application However you can change the base spreading factor for the display and thus the number of displayed codes Alias power Note however that if you select a base spreading factor that is lower than the actual spreading factor used by the channel e g 64 for channels with a base spreading fac tor of 128 the results are distorted This is due to the fact th
219. nels in the copy BITS Channel Tables tette Eee Ere e eicere ee ucc ntis exte e te boue xtd 227 A 1 1 BTS Channel Tables The cdma2000 BTS Analysis application provides the following set of channel tables compliant with the cdma2000 specification ED The standard does not specify a channel number for the data channels Channel table Contents RECENT Contains the most recently selected channel table MPC RC1 Base Station Main Path 6 Channels Radio Configuration 1 Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 data channels MPC_RC4 Base Station Main Path 6 Channels Radio Configuration 4 Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 data channels TDC_RC4 Base Station Transmit Diversity Path 6 Channels Radio Configuration 4 Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 data channels BPC_RC4 Base Station Both Paths 6 Channels Radio Configuration 4 Channel table with F PICH F TDPICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 data channels Table 1 1 Base station channel table for main branch in radio configuration 1 MPC_RC1 Channel Type Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Radio Configuration Code SF F PICH 1 0 64 F SYNC 1 32 64 Reference Predefined Channel Tables Channel Type Number of Channels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Radio Configuration F PCH 1 64 F CHAN 9 64 10 64 11 64 15 64 17 64 25 64 ot ek sek ek Xo eh Channel Type
220. nfiguring the Applica tion Data Range MSRA mode only on page 219 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual SENSe CDPowet lIOLength 2 2 202 Irene certos te sevi E E EES 156 SENSeJOCDPOWer QUA efit hia tet qiu pr er EXER PEOR RR Ready ai 156 SENSe CDPower SET COUNLE ieeecs cepe e cathe ttn eek atn nopbnknknn aka n ananas phani nia on Las 156 SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of the power control group Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 64 RST 3 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Manual operation See Number of PCGs on page 79 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Manual operation See Invert Q on page 79 SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Number of Sets on page 79 for more information Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 1 to 1500 BTS mode or 810 MS mode RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Sets the number of sets to be captured to 10 Manual operation See Number of Sets on page 79 11 5 6 Channel Detection Configuring Code Domain Analysis The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in
221. ng abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FPS is abbreviated as R amp S FPS R amp S FPS K82 R amp S9FPS K83 is abbreviated as R amp S FPS K82 K83 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 Contents arpr M 7 About this Manual 7 Documentation OVGIrViCW ciiiccccccccecccceesseeccceesseeececeesteeddecensteedeceesceeecceessneedcesesteeddeeeestecs 8 Typographical Conventions cccccccesseeneeceseenseeeeeseenseeeeseeeeseseeseansaeeeseeaeseeesseenseeeeeeeas 9 Welcome to the CDMA2000 Applications eese 10 Starting the CDMA2000 Applications eeeeeeeeneenennnnneennn nnn 11 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeneeenennnnn n 12 Measurements and Result Displays eeeeeeeees 14 Code Domain Analysis tein e ace deep xxu ee c EX NE sted eX Xx MU eer Ce sex a ROUEN RR ENEKEN 14 RF Measuremiaents n eer peteret Pee e niet EE eege 30 Measurement BASICS s 38 PCGS and El 38 Channels Codes and Symbol s cesceeceeseeee cee eeee eee eeeeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaneeseeeees 38 Code Display and Sort Order
222. ng factor of the channel lt TOFFset gt Timing offset returns a 9 if the timing phase offset measurement is switched off or the number of active channel exceeds 50 unit s Retrieving Results Value Description Range Unit lt POFFset gt Phase offset returns a 9 if the timing phase offset measurement is switched off or the number of active channel exceeds 50 unit rad lt CDPRelative gt Relative to total 0 dBm or pilot power channel power lt CDPabsolute gt Absolute channel dB power lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude RMS lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak Read out the modulation type with the command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 11 9 3 14 11 9 3 15 11 9 4 Symbol Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each symbol are transferred Rep lt Imp gt Re4 lt Im gt lt Re gt Im The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor With transmit diversity activated the number of values is reduced to half For details see Number of bits per symbol on page 40 Symbol EVM When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one EVM value per symbol is returned The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor Wi
223. ng factor of 128 SENS CDP SFAC 128 Configure compensation for I Q offset SENS CDP NORM ON Calculate timing and phase offset SENS CDP TPM ON Define relative code power results referred to total power of the signal SENS CDP PDIS REL SENS CDP PREF TOT Use bit reverse sort order for code display SENS CDP ORD BITR e Data acquisition Configure data capture for 3 PCGs analyze set 0 code number 3 SENS CDP IQL 3 SENS CDP SET 0 SENS CDP CODE 3 Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Retrieve the composite EVM CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES MACC Retrieve the CALC MARK FUNC hannel power relative to total power DP BTS RES CDPR CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES PTOT Retrieve the peak error vector magnitude in percent C e C Retrieve the total power C D C CALC MAR K FUNC CDP BTS RES EVMP Retrieve the trace data of the Code Domain Error Power display TRAC3 DATA TRACE1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables A Annex Reference Data A 1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables provide quick configuration for the channel search in com monly used measurement scenarios in accordance with the cdma2000 specification To use channels other than those in the predefined channel tables you can copy the original tables and modify the chan
224. nge is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 148 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 148 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FPS you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however Code Domain Analysis When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator
225. nnel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 164 Parameters lt FileName gt string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 83 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 164 Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes the table Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 83 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Manual operation See Restoring Default Tables on page 83 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the channel table must be switched on first with the com mand CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 161 Parameter
226. nsert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in the channel table b Define the channel specifications required for detection Channel type Channel number and spreading factor used by the channel Symbol rate Which RC is used BTS mode only Which mapping is applied MS mode only The channel s code domain power relative to the total signal power The channel s state active or inactive 5 Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box 6 To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table R amp S9FPS K82 K83 How to Perform Measurements in CDMA2000 Applications a c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Toggle the Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table setting to On e Start a new measurement To perform an RF measurement 1 Select the MODE key and the cdma2000 BTS application for base station tests or cdma2000 MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the RF measurement a Press the MEAS key b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The
227. ntation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In CDMA2000 applications the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands and not described for each command individually Suffix Value range Description n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 CDA Trace 6 RF lt m gt 1 4 CDA Marker 1 16 RF lt ch gt 1 18 Tx channel Channel in RF measurements 1 11 ALT channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Line in RF measurements 1 2 Display line Activating the Measurement Channel 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel CDMA2000 measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS The mea surement is started immediately with the default settings INS Trament OREate DDPLIc8le ciet eno aret neret sean etate RENE 130 INSTr ment GREalte NEW sissantina aana aiandid iaaiiai 130 INSTrumentGREat REPLacoe eni eot do e kx deep A AEE AE RE NAAA Ak 131 INS Wiese ie GEN 131 NS WUE SE RES 131 INSTrument RENGME aacra E EE dee Seed 132 INS Trment S El ect TEE 133 SYSTemiPRESebpOHANnSIEEXE Cute oc daa rur ptem rut t ere eee es 133 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum
228. nuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization Starting a Measurement For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 185 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 89 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With measurement count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the correspond ing number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 89 INITiate lt n gt
229. o the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 77 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER IN connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER AUX connector RFPower First intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 75 See Free Run on page 75 See External Trigger 1 2 on page 75 See IF Power on page 75 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT conn
230. ollowing results are displayed the first window shows the power of the code domain of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see chapter 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Fre quency Error on page 117 the repetition rate of the measurement increases Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM In the second window the Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error The Trigger to Frame shows the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG 10 4 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset 10 4 2 10 5 The delay between the trigger event and the start of the PCG can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset 1 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 2 TRIG gt Trigger Offset 100 us The following results are displayed the first window shows the power of the code domain of the signal In the second window the Result Summary is displayed The Trigger to Frame offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG has been eliminated Behaviour With the Wrong PN Offset The last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measure ment is only valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the same as that of the transmit signal gt Signal Description gt PN Offset 200 In the Result Summary the Trigger to Frame result is not correct Also the error
231. ommand selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FPS If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 65 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 154 RIES Leer Ti 142 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FPS on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 66 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup For more information see chapter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 68 e COIN aoc sete NIST 142 e Amplitude and Scaling Settiigs EE 145 Configuring the EE E EE 148 Frequency SENSE FRE Quenec y GENTE EE 143 SENSe FREQuencyr CENTer S TEP iiaiai ce pi Do de Rana ture phe HELP 143 SENS amp FRE QUN GENTerSTEPJAU TO itat vertu betae re tet vete eet in 143 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SBNSeTEREOUShcV EEN STEP LINK tico tern rnnt tt ene 144 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FAGCTOr
232. oncerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for Some special marker functions which are not available in the CDMA2000 applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual e Code Domain Analysis Stings iis uec ss nee tc der io e e eee ee 98 Evaluation re E 100 QUE CO Ur 102 XE uc m M EA 103 7 1 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for CDA mea surements are described here Compensate IQ Offset Timing and phase offset calculation Code Domain Power Code Power Display Absolute Relative Pilot Power Display Absolute Power Reference PICH Total Code Display Order Hadamard Code Domain Analysis Settings Baso USAGI Bae toten Mee ege ta i nn edd m o dr 99 Compensate IG OfSel oot err tm ese ORE CU v AER 99 Timing and phase offset calculation sssssssssssesessee eene 99 Code Power Tis plays cer acer reden lavet ao cu puer dba aia vore buda 99 Pilot Power Display MS application only c teen tte cete 99 Power IReferelleg 5one tede eR E EE asit EUER ALI is x RID D EE 100 Code Display Orde iere aatis rideau ope ent n Fa ern e dede tants bera eee 100 Base Spreading Factor Changes the base spreading factor which also changes the s
233. ontrol Group R9 Set to Analyze Goda WEE echt E 101 Powar Control EODD EE 101 MICE TO AAI ZG D X 101 Branch MS application Only coe teas trc te tir eae t ete 101 Evaluation Range Code Number Selects a code for the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Meth ods for Code Domain Analysis on page 17 Bitstream Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM The specified code is selected and marked in red For details on how specific codes are displayed see chapter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 168 Power Control Group Selects a PCG for the following evaluations Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Power Composite Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 169 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 79 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 168 Branch MS application only Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch in MS measurements This affects the following evaluations Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code
234. order by code class and within the code class in ascending order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class of the base spreading factor In MS measurements the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All active channels 2 Allinactive or quasi active channels in ascending code number order branch first followed by Q branch Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in ascending order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class of the base spreading factor Measurement Example Retrieving the BTS Channel Table Values The example shows the results of the query for 5 channels with the following configura tion Chan type Ch no SF Code class Power PICH 0 64 6 7 0 dB PCH 1 64 6 7 3 dB CHAN 8 32 5 8 0 dB CHAN 24 128 7 9 0 dB alias with 24 64 SYNC 32 64 6 13 3 dB INST SEL BC2K Activate cdma2000 BTS default is CDP relative in window 1 and Result Summary in window 2 NIT CONT OFF NIT CONT OFF LAY REPL WIND NIT WAI TRAC TRACE1 Select single sweep Select single sweep 1 CTAB Read out channel table Result IIA e Be De Oy 0 0 Lf 3325 0 mius 42 pe Oe de Oey OS 10 5 8 3 1 0y 10 7 24 3 us FIM Gy 2 3 411 6 e Tm 11 6 63 3 47 7 Measurement Example Retrieving the MS Channel Table Values ele EE Se 0y 9 0 54 54 Start mea
235. ote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 174 Parameters lt Evaluation gt Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example CALC FEED XPOW CDP Selects the Code Domain Power result display Table 11 8 lt Evaluation gt parameter values String Parameter Text Parame Evaluation ter XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation CCONst Composite Constellation XPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power 11 15 Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measurements String Parameter Text Parame Evaluation ter XTIM CDP COMP EVM CDEVm Composite EVM XPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDP PVSYmbol PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary RSUMmary Result Summary XPOW CDP RATio SCONSt Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FPS or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small N
236. ote that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FPS programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 167 SENSe CDPower PRESet This command resets the CDMA2000 channel to its predefined settings Any RF mea surement is aborted and the measurement type is reset to Code Domain Analysis Note that this command is retained for comaptibility reasons only For new remote con trol programs use the SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute command Usage Event Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measure ments The following programming example demonstrates how to perform Code Domain Analysis on a CDMA2000 signal in a remote environment It assumes the network has been set up for remote control Note that some commands may not be necessary as they reflect the default instrument settings however they are included to demonstrate their use a aa as a al as Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Programming Examples for CDMA2000 BTS Measurements Activate a CDMA2000 BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BC2K BTSMeasurement Select the code domain analysis measurement CONF CDP BTS MEAS CDP Stop continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Eeer Configuring the Measurement Set the reference level to 0 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the center frequency to 878 49 MHz FREQ CENT 878 49 MHz pfe Trigger settings Us
237. ower Level Hysteresis Marker Config Meastime Aulo needed npe ie Meastime Manual sssiisssciiiiai ansint MIR 2 enn Next Min Next Peak Norm Delta Outputs Config ds liz DP E Ref Level Offset RF Atten Auto RF Atten Manual i Scale CoOhlflg TE Signal ele TEE Signal Description um Single SWEEP EE SWeep COMTO ET Sweep count da TDPIGH asses Trace Config Trigger Config Trigger Offset Upper Level Hysteresis Sort order Bit RRGVOSO soeroep ienne eaa iie 40 Codes Hadamard Span DTE 55 Special channels ACKCH Transmit diversity ET 46 Specifics for elle Uu LTE 59 Spectrum Emission Mask 86 SEMs ai s ege E t ee eal 32 Spreading WC Lee 19 38 39 EE 24 Display 99 171 Querying ene EE 188 Relationship to code class sssssssssss 39 Relationship to symbol rate sessesssse 39 Status Bat iege ite od ete Cod n Notes 13 CANNES ries cece 2 de genee 19 86 88 163 Status registers Contents Querying Suffixes COMMON iacit tee tel mto EO ees 129 Remote commands end 1 p cerro deed 126 Sweep ADONG EE 89 Configuration softkey cisini 88 Configuring remote 164 OUT 21 chc te iei co Ho bc ette OR eed 88 Symbol Constellation 2 treten gedet 27 Evaluation Method oec eis HR
238. play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division For example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 70 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 70 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off If activated the input signal is amplified by 20 dB If option R amp S FPS B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FPS B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example I
239. ple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate a CDMA2000 application a new measurement channel is created which determines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be activated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 11 R amp S9FPS K82 K83 Welcome to the CDMA2000 Applications are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FPS User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram in the CDMA2000 BTS applica tion All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following
240. r ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the CDMA2000 standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Refer ence Supported Bandclasses on page 232 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 172 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Table 6 5 Predefined settings for CDMA2000 OBW measurements Setting Default value Power Bandwidth 99 Channel bandwidth 1 2288 MHz The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FPS User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are
241. r Type on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 104 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 183 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference 11 10 2 2 11 10 2 3 Genera
242. r application you would now like to analyze the same data in the CDMA2000 BTS application 1 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 2 Select the Signal Capture button User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 113 3 Define the application data range as and the Number of Sets You must deter mine the number of sets according to the following formula No of sets measurement time in seconds 80 ms time per set Enter the next larger integer value 4 Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula capture offset starting point for application starting point in capture buf fer 5 The analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected chan nel slot or frame to analyze defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the frame slot channel is analyzed within the application data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the capture buf fer move through the frames slots channels in the evaluation range or correct the application data range 6 Ifthe Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep menu to update the result displays for the changed application data Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 10 Measurement Examples The following measurement examples demonstrate the basic Code Domai
243. r onte 32 Configuring cdma2000 sse 95 Measurement examples i 146 Results remote zc 191 Sequencer 11 54 Aborting remote 184 Activating remote sises ceanii 185 dee EE 185 aio f M PH 183 Sets Captures petens ori retta adt atte Definition Evaluation range sie E HE ie Settings OQVEWISW rectis tek ek puerta e E CH uae ok Eos t ede Show inactive channels Signal capturing Remote commands oett a rr tren cete 155 enc M 78 Signal channel power Measurement examples issii inetisuoiisns iieniini 115 Signal description BTS remote BTS Configuration Configuring MS remote ainsi roster eiecit estere ct eii be ona ta MS Config rati m EE Remote commands bus SOK OY 2e obit eer Signal source nj ET 142 Single sweep feci 89 Single ZOOM m 92 Slope die GE Softkeys Amplitude Config EE Auto All Auto Level Bandclasses Capture Offset Center us Channel Detection iuc eee cese eed es Code Domain Settings Continue Single Sweep PT Continuous SWeGDp ciere et tete rrt eun Display CONTIG ME Evaluation Range Export nm External Free Run Frequency Config D le e ue SEET Input Source Config IQ Export ariii IQ Itnport zn L
244. r which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 210 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 211 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 211 Markers Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 210 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 211 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on
245. races lt t gt is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 73 Configuring Code Domain Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 73 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 73 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis
246. ral different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 182 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 181 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 181 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 182 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 181 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 182 for each multiple zoom window RF Measurements 6 3 RF Measurements CDMA2000 measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS which you activate using the MODE key When you activate a CDMA2000 application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the CDMA2000 applications also provide various RF measurement types Selecting the measurement type gt
247. ration See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 71 11 5 9 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display Configuring Code Domain Analysis Ee Re RE 168 SENSe CU Power MAP Ping EE 168 SENSeCDPOWEMSEM m 168 SENSeTODPOWeIRSE QT cadet rh Tee eaa tiep dax a deban dene a RR eua preda 169 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNo gt This command selects the code number For further details refer to Code Number on page 101 Parameters lt CodeNo gt lt numeric value gt Range 0 to base spreading factor 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP CODE 8 Selects the eighth channel Manual operation See Code Number on page 101 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between the and Q branch of the signal Parameters lt SignalComponent gt l Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Manual operation See Mapping on page 88 See Branch MS application only on page 101 SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET COUNt command before using this com mand Parameters lt SetNo gt Range 0 to SET COUNT 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 11th set for further analysis counting starts with O Manual operation See Set to Analyze on
248. rement for a specific trace lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 34 11 10 General Analysis The following commands configure general result analysis settings concerning the trace and markers for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the Remote Commands Analysis chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual EMEND m mU 209 NEED IM TTE 210 General Analysis 11 10 1 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In cdma2000 applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlay WINDow n TRAGCe st MODE 1 reri ee tun asas e cuna ma En eye e aaa e 209 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essent 210 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In cas
249. rement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 88 Automatic Settings QD MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However CDMA2000 applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 145 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically SENSE ADITAL onesna A A E AEAEE EA 165 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation esses enne 166 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE ceci eene nnn nnne aaia ii 166 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure Hv teresls LOMer rentrer ttererorerorererernnnnnen 167 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure H teresles Uber 167 SENSeJADJUSEDEVOel 1 5 14 rn Es odo nae cote RR eene eer eaae cete a ee 167 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 90 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration
250. results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 144 6 2 5 2 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FPS must process or display the expected input power levels Code Domain Analysis To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Reference Level 2 rte reete eet a e eua d 70 L Shifting the Display Offset ecrnscnrni ie a eaii 70 e E 71 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 71 FRE ATO UII 71 L Attenuation Mode Value 71 Using HE e e DE 71 IMPUl SQUINGS e 72 L Preamplifier option B33IB241 72
251. rformance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note The CDMA2000 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions SSS ae User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 32 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays EH Ref Level 41 00 dBm Offset 40 00 dB 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA 3GPP DL Tx Power 33 74 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Range Up Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit 8 000 MHz 000 MHz 2 09153 GHz 39 37 dBm 73 11 dB 18 61 dB 4 000 MHz MHz 2 09494 GHz 39 75 dBm 73 48 dB 22 98 dB 15 MHz 30 000 kHz 2 09642 GHz 50 91 dBm 84 65 dB 21 15 dB MHz 20 001 2 09652 GHz 51 84 dBm 85 57 dB 22 65 dB 2 09739 GHz 52 33 dBm 86 07 dB 34 57 dB 2 10259 GHz 49 37 dBm 83 11 dB 31 61 dB 2 10342 GHz 50 68 dBm 84 42 dB 22 27 dB 2 10373 GHz 51 81 dBm 85 55 dB 22 05 dB 2 10439 GHz 38 64 dBm 72 37 dB 21 87 dB 2 11026 GHz 39 24 dBm 72 97 dB 18 47 dB Fig 3 17 SEM measurement results for the BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ESP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 206 CALCulate lt n
252. ry STORe lt n gt IQ STATe MMEMory STOResn TRAGS inr ipei reta t UEA en een Fa eere REDE NENU PATEE DUATEPE NE ENC E Re KR TA Uasi OCUTPUEMRIGGErSPOMm DIRCCHON P M OUTPut TRIGgersport EEN s ctr rtr terere rrr een te ere Eee een Papx OUTPut TRIGger port OT YPe oii reir Prnt ei ker rere o Ia e eee e Fr ae rc ee seeps eratis OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMeHd Aale ne eterna eE tert n Fixer are ker OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe EENGILh rae torret te rennen entr rre TER eon STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition STATus QUEStIonable SYNG ENABIG ccrte retener eru exea Eesen STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRarnsitiOh ornat tre ern rrt cen n nente en ende ten STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRahsitlOhi i retreat renean tht enn eren kb e e nons STAT s QUEStionable SYNG EMENIJ tenu orti notet te tn tpe epe n req rhe TE UR EA De REN de eeu RE 222 SYSTem e ER e D E 133 SYSTEM SEQUEM CCN m M 186 TRANG Si pif 191 TRIGger SEQuerice DTIMS site taper etr e rtp rn rhet rne tenere aec enenatis 150 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOoff TIME tnter m rr trn rr enr irren en n renean 150 T lee EE Ower FIOLDDOI T si corrente roa sentent eg ERA EERSTEN EXER cusan 150 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HYS Teresis ctn trt rrr pene n nr tn n ener epe 151 TRIGger SEQuence LEVEI F POWE iriiri ri cr
253. s sessssssse 61 63 137 Emor MESSAGES dcs creda ERN i de 110 Error vector magnitude SOG EVM m 22 Errors IF OWED 5 70 Evaluation methods Ee tete se a Ue ERE 174 Evaluation range Bragh erorii Channel bius picco T Remote commands n enemies 167 EIS cs nre nite Settings SOfIKGy eret eret mrt heces Evaluations CDA 17 Dig 35 see also Result Displays tme 14 E iei sore dett ne etd ote en ees 14 EVM lu 22 Results remote 3 heim teat 188 VS CRIP m t 202 vs symbol 16 19 28 Exporting l G data ii tiere tte td 52 53 55 237 VQ data remote nde 217 SORKEY gege geed degt ENEE 53 Trace results remote 204 External trigger undo Level remote ei rente rtt tenni nra 151 Files Format l Q data dnce tn ems UO data binary XML UC parameter XML rrr titt Filter types Mult carrier x etc cn ENEE 61 63 136 Filters Cut off frequency sess 62 64 135 Multicarrier signals 43 61 63 136 Rolloff Ce 61 64 135 dl Ce EE 141 Format Data remole entia tice 191 Free Run TWIG GE 75 Frequency Belt le ie ul E 68 Configuration remote sse 142 OMS Cb
254. s lt FileName gt RST RECENT Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 82 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 160 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 81 11 5 6 3 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent esses enne nnne tnnt 161 CONFigure GDPower BTS C EABle DATA 2 eer tetuer tede rhe caa Eel tena 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA isses neret hn hne nn ns 163 CONFloure CDbowerf BITSICTABIeNAME nennen eh nh nemen eren nnns 164 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 164
255. s and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FPS is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http Awww2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html 1 3 Typographical Conventions Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FPS by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html gt Downloads gt Firmware Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quot
256. s for MS mode configured according to a specific radio configuration Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 159 Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focussed in the Predefined Tables list and com pares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 160 6 2 9 3 Code Domain Analysis Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table For a description of channel table settings and functions see chapter 6 2 9 3 Channel Table Settings and Functions on page 83 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 112 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 164 Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 160 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a message is confirmed Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete on page 160 Restoring Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables delivered with the instrument Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore
257. same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 BEL XPOW CDP ABSolute Adds a Code Domain Power display below window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream on page 18 See Channel Table on page 18 See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 20 See Composite Constellation on page 21 See Composite EVM on page 22 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 23 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 24 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 25 See Power vs PCG on page 26 See Power vs Symbol on page 27 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 See Diagram on page 35 See Result Summary on page 36 See Marker Table on page 36 See Marker Peak List on page 36 Table 11 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for CDMA2000 application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bits
258. sections The basic screen elements are identical in the CDMA2000 MS application MultiView 33 Spectrum CDMA2000 BTS Ref Level 1 Freq 1325 GHz Channel 0 64 Power Ref Rel to Piot Att JE PCG f SymbRate 15 1 Code Domain Power 2 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 3 Diagram area with marker information 4 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 5 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode RF measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In CDMA2000 applications the R amp S FPS shows the following settings User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 12 Understanding the Display Information Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in CDMA2000 applications Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor PCG Power control group see chapter 4 1 PCGs and Sets on page 38 Power Ref Reference used for power res
259. seseseeseeeeeecaneeeeas 215 CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum LEET 215 General Analysis CALCulatesn MARKersm MIBNIRYURE NEXT 21 aptae canna dada curata t c n d e e 215 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese nnne 215 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt eeeeeeee eene nnne nnne nnn 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH This command sets the marker to channel 0 64 Example CALC MARK FUNC DICH Activates marker and positions it at pilot 0 64 CALC MARK Y Queries value of the relative Code Domain Power of the pilot channel Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Marker To PICH on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TDPlich This command sets the marker to channel 16 128 Example CALC MARK FUNC TDPI Activates marker and positions it at TDPICH 16 128 CALC MARK Y Queries value of the relative Code Domain Power of the transmit diversity pilot channel Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Marker To TDPICH on page 109 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 108 CALCulate lt
260. sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 36 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Marker Peak List No 1 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 211 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 37 4 1 4 2 PCGs and Sets Measurement Basics CDMA200090 is based on code division multiplex access CDMA where all users share the same 1 25 MHz wide channel but use individual pseudo noise PN sequen ces for differentiation CDMA2000 was specified by 3GPP2 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 The fol lowing link provides access to 3GPP2 specifications http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs index cfm Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in CDMA2000 tests and measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings e POGS and SOUS inerte cie eri e LH re et EE eR vats aea thee aes 38 e Channels Codes and Symbols sse 38 e Code Display and Sort Order 40 e Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes ose ens 42 e Code Mapping and Branches ee 42 LIS e te UE MEE 43 e Transmission with Multiple Carriers and M
261. span Code Domain Analysis span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s foenter E fmax SPAN pin 2 fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 143 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 96 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 This setting is only available for MCWN measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 143 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final
262. ssband of the RRC filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 135 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FPS can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals e Input Source Settings uui eie rere terere er prn ei Ee Per aane nd ded ete 64 e OUDUE SUITES entre dre tec ees ares edd te diea deeds Duden 66 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FPS will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency Input dioecesano ct aed vs 64 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FPS is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FPS If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Code Domain Analysis Input Input Source Frequency Input Coupling Digital IQ Impedance YIG Preselector Radio Frequency Staten irae ree ed er El gra pe ori E tea dad 65 Jal cit gh ess Ue ro eee 65 rel oo rige ETE 65 WI
263. sult dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the CDMA2000 BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected set PCG or code to analyze which is defined for the evalua tion range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edited directly in the CDMA2000 BTS application but is changed automatically when you change the evaluation range Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL
264. surement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 133 Be Deel et EE 174 LAYout CATalog WINDoOW teet ito eec ce oerte coe c Ego buc 176 LAY outa DENUVEWINDONWJ 2 22 2 rex ERE RRFRFRO SR DE E aU Eee atre exer a px eru eu teE s certe uan 176 LAY oubREMevep le EE 177 LAYoutREPLace WINDOW ciiirt noraida evertere eec eei EEN 177 LAY UIE PMNS Mert E E 177 LA You WINDOWSBSIADDY TE 179 LAYOUR uk ele CT 179 LAYON WINDOW MS REMOVE oietan da sea esr a peg E Ped aao re UN aevo VE PE Ee VV a TS 179 LAYout WINDow xn REPLace eese eene eene nnne nnns nennen nensis inanis 180 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the
265. surement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Analog Demodulation R amp S FPS K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FPS K10 GSM GSM Noise R amp S FPS K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FPS K40 PNOISE Phase Noise VSA R amp S FPS K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FPS K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FPS K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FPS K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FPS K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FPS K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FPS K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FPS K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FPS K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FPS K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FPS K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename l
266. surement with synchronization 95 95 6 7 9y 9 Replace CDP by Channel Table evaluation in window 1 Retrieving Results The example shows the results of the query for 2 channels with the following configura tion Chan type Ch no SF Code class Mapping Power PICH 0 32 5 I 7 0 dB CCCH 2 8 10 0 dB INIT CONT OFF NIT CONT OFF LAY REPL WIND INIT WAI TRAC TRACE1 Select single sweep Select single sweep 1 CTAB Read out channel table Result 10 eo Be OF Oy 1 2 4 Ze 2y 1 EES 4p bu Xu du F9 by Uy Oy L 9 Dod Ay ELS a by De Oy 1S Bro Ze D 0 0 53 0 46 3 48 0 43 2 42 0 47 6 Start measurement with synchronization St Ha 9 9 10 0 9 9 53 3 9 9 sbb5u05 9 99 50 2 Jp 9 49 0 9 9 54 6 9 9 Replace CDP by Channel Table evaluation in window 1 Retrieving Results leans TAS op Bip Sg cd 4 1 954 7 9 9 Results for CTABle Parameter The command returns 12 values for each channel in the following order max time offset in s gt code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 reserved 6 Value Description Range Unit time offset maximum time offset S code number code number of the channel with maxi 0 127 BTS mum tim
267. t iq tar Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 Q Data File Format iq tar I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian dat
268. t ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 11 4 Selecting a Measurement Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 130 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt BC2K cdma2000 BTS option R amp S FPS K82 MC2K cdma2000 MS option R amp S FPS K83 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 58 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 14 CONFloure CDbower BTGlMEAGurement esee ener enne 133 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement Measurement This com
269. t in s Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Manual operation See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 20 See Composite Constellation on page 21 See Composite EVM on page 22 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 24 See Power vs Symbol on page 27 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 183 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 34 See Marker Table on page 36 See Marker Peak List on page 36 Retrieving CDA Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA mea surements Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be config ured Retrieving Results FORMat DATA Format
270. t power of the PCG Therefore the unit of the y axis is dB relative to the Pilot Channel The result display consists of the number of the PCGs in the measurement and the power value of each one For measurements in which antenna diversity is inactive OFF or set to Antenna 1 the F PICH channel is used as reference while the F TDPICH channel is used for measurements in which antenna diversity is set to Antenna 2 Note For signals with enabled power control use the default reference power setting For details refer to Power Reference on page 100 The measurement evaluates one code channel over the entire period of observation The selected PCG is highlighted red MS application the power is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q 4 Power vs PCG Fig 3 10 Power vs PCG Display for the BTS application Note To detect the start of a power control group correctly the external trigger must be used for power regulated signals Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 SS User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 26 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation calculates the absolute power in dBm for each symbol in the selected channel and the selected PCG 5 Power vs Symbol Fig 3 11 Power vs Symbol result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MAR
271. t rfe Ee nd nd 169 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal BTS e WE e ME 135 IMS Signal Dosen PUM sii uae ec corde teo ced bud rdc tt d or d 138 BTS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in BTS measurements For more information see chapter 4 7 Transmission with Multiple Carriers and Multi ple Antennas on page 43 CONFioure CDbower BTGlMCAbrer Fil TerCOtFReouencn 135 CONFloure CDbower BTGlMCAbrer Fi TerbROrt ssssssssesenenensnerererererrererersrernrnenen nenn 135 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe eese 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE 0 cccesecececeeeeesecedentnaesaceenseessenenees 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MAL Go 137 CONFloure CDbPower BTGlMCAbRrert SGTATel 137 SENSeTCDPOWOISAN Tema adus cort e e qe rueda e re tede reta dap tutte bete egere Poches 137 SENSe CDPowerPNOPF Set 2 isara innia aai aasian 138 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter Parameters Frequency Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter
272. t value Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Number of adjacent channels 2 For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FPS User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span e Number of adjacent channels e Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for ACLR and SEM measurements in CDMA2000 applications an additional softkey is available to select the required bandclass RF Measurements Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the CDMA2000 standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Refer ence Supported Bandclasses on page 232 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 172 6 3 3 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the CDMA2000 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performa
273. t32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData PreviewData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FPS For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 12 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs Min l ime lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 lt f lt f loat 134 float loat 142 float lt f loat 140 float ArrayOfFloat A 4 2 UO Data File Forma
274. tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open Joar xml file in web browser xslt UO Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in w
275. th over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean square The bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Sum mary In order to determine the signal channel power the CDMA2000 application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with the following set tings RF Measurements Table 6 2 Predefined settings for CDMA2000 Output Channel Power measurements Setting Default Value ACLR Standard CDMA2000 MC1 Number of adjacent channels 0 Frequency Span 2MHz For further details about the Power measurement refer to Channel Power and Adja cent Channel Power ACLR Measurements in the R amp S FPS User Manual 6 3 2 Channel Power ACLR Measurements The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyzes the power of the Tx channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the Tx chan nel The number of Tx channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class The bandwidth and power of the Tx channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed in the Result Sum mary Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to CDMA2000 specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio Table 6 3 Predefined settings for CDMA2000 ACLR Channel Power measurements Setting Defaul
276. th transmit diversity activated the number of values is reduced to half For details see Number of bits per symbol on page 40 Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FPS User Man ual MMEMGry STORe n TRACO iniaeeaa apaa nk bye as aS Us eua ga SA E Fea A ERR die 205 al ERT RR ET Ce EE 205 11 9 5 Retrieving Results MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Trace export is only available for RF measurements For details on the file format see Reference ASCII File Export Format in the R amp S FPS User Manual Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confir
277. the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayWINDows n gt ZOOM AREA nai NER REEE i 180 BISPlayEWINDowsn ZOOM STA Te rinni aasa anaa aiaa aiiai 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 92 M User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 180 R amp S FPS K82 K83 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements WEEN 11 7 3 2 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 92 See Restore Original Display on page 92 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 92 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 181 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe nnn nn ne 182
278. the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference is displayed for the pilot channel Remote command SENSe CDPower PPReference on page 170 Evaluation Range Power Reference For Code Domain Power evaluation in the MS application only Defines the reference for relative power display Total Relative to the total signal power PICH Relative to the power of the PICH Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 170 Code Display Order Defines the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays For further details on the code order refer to chapter 4 3 Code Display and Sort Order on page 40 and chapter A 2 Reference Code Tables on page 229 Hadamard By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order The power of each code is displayed there is no visible distinction between channels If a channel covers several codes the display shows the individual power of each code Bit Reverse Bundles the channels with concentrated codes i e all codes of a channel are next to one another Thus you can see the total power of a concentrated channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 169 7 2 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which channel Code Number PCG or set is analyzed in the result display For CDMA2000 MS measurements the branch to be analyzed can also be defined Code Number Power C
279. the input signal The commands for working with channel tables are described here When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query the following abbreviations and assignments to a numeric value are used Table 11 2 BTS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 PICH 1 SYNC 2 PCH 3 TDPICH 4 APICH 5 ATDPICH 6 BCH 7 CPCCH 8 CACH 9 CCCH 10 CHAN 11 INACTIVE 12 PDCCH 13 PDCH Table 11 3 Allowed RC values depending on channel type for BTS measurements RC Channel type Modulation 0 all special channels not CHAN PDCH 112131 4 5 CHAN 10 PDCH QPSK 20 PDCH 8PSK 30 PDCH 16QAM Table 11 4 MS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 PICH 1 EACH CCCH 11 5 6 1 11 5 6 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameter Channel type 3 DCCH 4 ACKCH 5 CQICH 6 FCH 7 S1CH 8 S2CH 9 INACTIVE e General Channel Detection ecce eee teinte khen nnne pn nah nanana 158 e Managing Gharnel Tables cct rtt eter itid ce acce een 158 e Configuring Channel Tables t RES HERES ARRAEREE MER CERRRRS aAA 161 General Channel Detection The following commands configure how channels are detected in general Useful commands
280. the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event R amp S FPS K82 K83 Remote Commands for CDMA2000 Measurements u O eee 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Zooming into
281. tream CCONst Composite Constellation CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CDPower Code Domain Power Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table LEValuation List evaluation SEM Power vs Time MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PPCG Power vs PCG PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt Windowlndex Example Usage string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index numeric value Index of the window LAY CAT Result L TER 7 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing th
282. trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FPS has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 67 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 68 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 67 Signal Capturing The following commands configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal Configuring Code Domain Analysis MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for the CDMA2000 application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 11 12 Co
283. udes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 11 11 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 52 MMEMO e Bue ge E NEE 217 MMEMory STORe n Q COMMSBnI iiie ccrtc idc tao eie ei cease cde ee o raa Ru 218 TEE Le E VE 218 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See UO Import o
284. ue is transferred for each PCG lt PCG number level value in gt The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured PCGs 11 9 3 7 EVM vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of vector error values of all chips at the selected PCG is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the square root of the square difference between the received signal and the reference sig nal for each chip normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected PCG 11 9 3 8 Frequency Error vs PCG When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one pair of PCG and error value is transferred for each PCG PCG number value in Hz 11 9 3 9 Power vs PCG When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one pair of PCG and level values is transferred for each PCG PCG numbers level value in dB The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured PCGs 11 9 3 10 Peak Code Domain Error The command returns 2 values for each PCG in the following order PCG numbers level value in dB The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured PCGs 11 9 3 11 Phase Discontinuity vs PCG When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one pair of PCG and value is trans ferred for each PCG PCG numbers value in deg 11 9 3 12 11 9 3 13 Power vs Symbol Retrieving Results When the trace data for this evaluation is queried
285. uences and fixed code numbers The automatic search provides an overview of the channels con tained in the currently measured signal If channels are not detected as being active change the Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Predefined channel search mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 161 6 2 9 2 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview Predefined Tables 2 nen EAEE 82 Selecting a TADS c EM 82 Creating a New Table lees ciet iieri teen p ntn RR xe ERR RA a dea RR adip 83 Editing E Ez o E t 83 GOP YING a VAIO e 83 RTE EE E 83 Iestornmg DefaulE Tablgs crt rtc erecti ete ree o eret etae 83 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focussed table is highlighted blue For details on predefined channel tables provided by the CDMA2000 applications see chapter A 1 Reference Predefined Channel Tables on page 227 The following channel tables are available by default RECENT Contains the most recently selected channel table BPC_RC4 MPC RC1 MPC_RC4 TDC RC4 Channel tables for BTS measurements configured according to a specific radio configuration EACHOP RCCCHOP RTCHOP3 RTCHOP5 Channel table
286. ues for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the R amp S FPS is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much User Manual 1176 8539 02 03 48 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input REF INPUT of the R amp S FPS e The R amp S FPS must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the CDMA2000 specification for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the device under test DUT has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the DUT to one of the trigger inputs TRIGGER INPUT of the R amp S FPS see Trigger 2 on page 67 Presettings For details see chapter 6 2 Code Domain Analysis on page 55 e Enter the external attenuation e Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency e Set the trigger e If used enable the external reference e Select the
287. ultiple Antennas 43 e Channel Detection and Channel Types iiec eee tein 45 e Test Setup for CDMA2000 Tests sessi nnns nennen 47 e CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode 49 PCGs and Sets The user data is transmitted in individual data packages each of which may have dif ferent transmission settings such as the power level The data in one such package for which the power remains constant is called a power control group or PCG A PCG has a duration of 1 25 ms or 1536 chips same as slots in other standards The CDMA2000 applications can capture up to 31360 PCGs about 26 seconds in a single sweep In order to improve performance during measurement and analysis the captured PCGs are not processed by the CDMA2000 application all at once but rather in sets one at a time One set consists of 64 PCGs You can select how many sets are to be captured and which set is currently analyzed and displayed The possible value range is from 1 to a maximum of 490 sets Channels Codes and Symbols In CDMA2000 applications the data is transmitted in channels These channels are based on orthogonal codes and can have different symbol rates The symbol rate depends on the used modulation type and the spreading factor of the channel R amp S FPS K82 K83 Spreading factors Measurement Basics ee M eee ee ee eae Spreading factors determine whether the transmitted data is sent in short or long sequences The
288. ults SymbRate Symbol rate of the currently selected channel In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Code Domain Power Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in CDMA2000 applications 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Displays The CDMA2000 applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the CDMA2000 standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the CDMA2000 standard the CDMA2000 applications offer measurements with predefi
289. uration functions This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for CDA measurements Code Domain Analysis can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated for CDMA2000 can not only be measured by the CDMA2000 applications themselves it can also be imported to the applications provi ded it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the CDMA2000 applications can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the EJ Save or DN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FPS User Manual 6 2 1 Code Domain Analysis Default Settings for Code Domain Analyse 56 Conlgurauon OVervigW x x eco tot Ebro ndo ct e Eae RE Pe e doc uaa Duet Neues 57 SlOMial DESCHPUOM TE 59 Data input and Output Settings mt ee ett terr deeem rate axe ne pha ee aeta tee Aves laden 64 Frontend Kl TT M 68 Deeds E 73 Signal Capture Data Acquisition 78 Application Data MSRA EE 79 Channel leiere esu 80 Sweep e 88 Lernen le EE 90 ZOOM atop M 91 Default Settings for Code Domain An
290. urement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PCDerror see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 188 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The phase error is calculated by the difference of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configu ration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 Fig 3 9 Calculating the magnitude phase and vector error per chip PHI ds ox N 2560 ke 0 1 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot x phase calculation of a complex value R amp S FPS K82 K83 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Phase Error vs Chip Chip 2559 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Power vs PCG In this result display the power of the selected channel is averaged for each measured PCG and referred to the pilo
291. ust be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 on page 67 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 153 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FPS starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency Code Domain Analysis This trigger source is only available for RF input This trigger source is available for frequency and time domain measurements only The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 153 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 151 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command
292. vates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multicarrier signals This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 61 is activated For details see chapter 4 7 1 Multicarrier Mode on page 43 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 136 Filter Type Multicarrier Selects the filter type if Multicarrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter 6 2 4 6 2 4 1 Code Domain Analysis By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Fre quency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 136 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 135 Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the frequency at which the pa
293. y WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e OMEN VAES caen IEEE 127 le BEE 128 e Charactef Da EE 128 e Character EE 129 e E oe a D oos esee ere ee rentre Pepe dae p OUR dete 129 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead

R&S FPS-K82/-K83 CDMA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FPS-K82/-K83 CDMA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FPS-K82/-K83 CDMA User Manual